<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
<text>
<body>
<pb n="1" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="2" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="3" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="4" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="5" />
<p>POLITICAL CONCEPTS IN
ANCIENT INDIA
A Glossary of Political Terms
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="6" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="7" />
<p>POLITICAL CONCEPTS IN
ANCIENT INDIA
A Glossary of Political Terms
P. K. CHAUDHURI
S.Chand & Company Ltd
RAM NAGAR, NEW DELHI-110055</p>
<pb n="8" />
<p>JA
(4
'S26
C48
1977
S. CHAND & COMPANY LTD
Ram Nagar, New Delhi-110055
Show Room: 4/16-B, ASAF ALI ROAD, NEW DELHI-110002
Branches
Mai Hiran Gate, Jullundur-144008 285/J, Bipin Bebari Ganguly Street,
Calcutta-700012
Aminabad Park, Lucknow-226001
Blackie House
103/5 Walchand Hirachand Marg,
Bombay-400001
35, Mount Road, Madras-600002
Khazanchi Road, Patna-800004
Sultan Bazar, Hyderabad-500001
KPCC Bldg., Race Course Road
Bangalore-560009
3, Gandhi Sagar East
Nagpur-440002
Published with the financial assistance from the Ministry
of Education and Social Welfare, Government of India.
Digitized by
First published 1977
Published by S. Chand & Company Ltd, Ram Nagar, New Delhi-110055
and printed at Rajendra Ravindra Printers (Pvt) Ltd, Ram Nagar,
New Delhi-110055
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="9" />
<p>Dedicated
to the memory of my late father,
Rohini Kumar Chaudhuri,
who has always been a source of inspiration to me in
my pursuit of knowledge</p>
<pb n="10" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="11" />
<p>Preface
It has been the aim of the author to acquaint
students interested in the study of ancient Indian
History with the fundamentals of political termino-
logy.
Man has come up to his present stage of living
through a series of steps in civilization, beginning
with a stone age, followed by a bronze age, an iron
age etc. These various stages of human develop-
ment have been modified by the persistent influence
of local environment of the people.
Religious organisations grew with that society;
contacts with strangers possessed of better weapon,
tools, clothing, etc. or even good food stuffs or
valuable resources: agricultural or mineral, led
to war or trade, according to the relative strengths
and dispositions of the parties. Internecine wars,
or natural calamities have driven people to migra-
tion or invasions. All these have greatly influenced
the political conditions of the country leading to
changes in polity and apolitical thoughts.
In undertaking any study it is necessary to look
to the historical background, as many of the current
views and practices are more or less traditional
having been handed down from one generation to
another. It is also necessary to know the origin
of some of the ancient notions in order to be able
to judge more accurately as to their correctness.</p>
<pb n="12" />
<p>There are two ways of studying the political
institutions of any society either analysing the ideas
pronounced by the historical personalities or
subjecting the ancient works to a kind of language
analysis. In the West, this mode of content
analysis has come into vogue, behaviourists,
structuralists and logicists follow this mode of
analysis, especially in the USA and the U.K.
viii
This work, though it does not intend to pro-
pound a system of analysis, however it attempts
to provide the raw materials for those who wish to
study ancient Indian polity through the window
of language analysis.
This work was initiated in London under the
inspiration received from Professor A.L. Basham
who was author's teacher in the University.
Author's subsequent assignments prevented
him from continuing the work in London and he
had to return to India. The writer is glad to have
this opportunity of expressing his heartfelt thanks
to Professor Basham for his helpful guidance and,
the great interest he has shown during the initial
stage of the work.
On his return to India, the writer had the privi-
lege of continuing the work under the personal
guidance of Professor Mukunda Madhava Sharma,
Head of the Department of Sanskrit, Gauhati
University. He is particularly indebted to Pro-
fessor Sharma for his unending kindness in
helping him to clear up many points in connection
with the preparation of this work. Grateful
acknowledgements are also due to Mrs. Elima
Sharma, learned wife of Professor Sharma, for her</p>
<pb n="13" />
<p>ix
ungrudging help in putting the diacritical marks
in the type copies of the work which was subse-
quently accepted as thesis for the award of the
Ph. D. degree of the Gauhati University.
Finally, grateful thanks are tendered to Shri
D. K. Borooah, President of the Indian National
Congress for his usual generosity in helping the
author with his vast treasure of erudite scholarship
covering a wide variety of subjects. It was his
inspiration that led the author to publish this work.
P. K. CHAUDHURI
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="14" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="15" />
<p>এতী % कै । मैं া al ah art ভু ভু
अ
आ
इ
ओ
अं
श्रः
ख
ग
घ
this Ip 150 15 hr
ज
झ
ञ
ट
Digitized by
Scheme of Transliteration
-
—
-
-
-
a
ದ
a
i
i
PBB
u
ū
H
ai
0
au
an
ah .
k
kh
g
gh
i
ch
j
jh
n
t
Google
भय 41964GOI
ठ
ड
ढ
ण
त
थ
प
फ
ब
भ
No Im
म
य
र
ल
व
श
ह
ज्ञ
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
th
d
dh
n
th
d
dh
n
p
ph
b
bh
y
s'
•0
h
kş
jn
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="16" />
<p>-</p>
<pb n="17" />
<p>AB
Amara
AS'
AS' Basak
AS' Trans
Apte
AS PI
AWAI
Ep. Ind.
Gautama D.S.
Glossary
HD
HP
IAB
List of Abbreviations
Mbh (MBH)
Digitized by
..
..
Google
Aitareya Brahmana
Amarakosa of Amarasimha
Arthasastra
Arthasastra ed by R.G. Basak
Arthasastra translated by R.
Shamasastry
The Students Sanskrit English
Dictionary by V. S. Apte
The Allahabad Store Pillar
Inscription of Samudra-
gupta
The Art of War in Ancient India
Epigraphia Indica
Gautama Dharma Sutra
Indian Epigraphical Glossary by
D. C. Sircar
History of Dharmasastras by
MM.P.V. Kane
Hindu Polity by K.P. Jayaswal
India in the Age of the Brah-
manas by J. R. Basu
Mahabharata
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="18" />
<p>Manu Sam.
MS
SGAI
SNS
Yajnavalkya
Digitized by
..
xiv
Manu Samhita
Do.
State and Government in Ancient
India by A.S. Altekar
Sukranitisara
Yajnavalkya Smrti
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="19" />
<p>Scheme of Transliteration
List of Abbreviations
Introduction
Glossary
A
A
U
E
AU
ΚΑ
KHA
GA
CA
JA
ΤΑ
DA
DHA
ΝΑ
PA
BA
BHA
Table of Contents
Digitized by
Google
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
xi
xiii-xiv
1-28
31-184
31-51
51-57
57-64
64
64
65-72
72
73-79
79-81
81-84
84-86
86-96
97-99
99-102
102-115
115 118
119-122
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="20" />
<p>MA
YA
RA
LA
VA
Ś
• cs
Ş
SA
HA
Bibliography
Digitized by Google
xvi
:
:
..
..
:
:
:
:
:
:
123-135
135-138
138-148
148
148-159
159-164
164-166
166-184
184
185-190
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="21" />
<p>Introduction
samāno mantraḥ samitiḥ samānī
samānaṁ manaḥ saha cittam eṣām</p>
<p>(Rgveda, x.191.3a)
(i) rājā na satyaḥ samitīriyānaḥ (IX.92.6)
(like a true king going to the Samiti)</p>
<p>(Same be their counsel, same their assembly, same
their mind and same their heart....). This is an oft-
quoted prayer from the Rgveda where we have two
technical terms, viz., Mantra and Samiti, relevant to
the study of ancient Indian politics. The term Samiti
refers to a popular assembly and from the other
term Mantra we can gather that the said assembly
used to indulge in deliberations aiming at and
resulting in state policies. Some other lines of the
Rgveda, containing the term Samiti, are</p>
<p>(ii) Yatrauṣadhīḥ samagmata rājānaḥ samitāviva
(X.97.6) (where the herbs met like kings in
the Samiti).
In these two quotations we have another important
term Rājā (king), which should unequivocally imply
that there was the institution of Kingship in the
Vedic age. Another popular assembly, of a size
bigger than that of the Samiti, which also met with</p>
<pb n="22" />
<p>some political programme was the Sabhā. This
term also occurs in the Ṛgveda, as in the passage,
sarve nandanti yaśasāgatena sabhāsahena sakhyā
sakhāyaḥ (X.71.10) (All the friends rejoice in the
company of a friend, come back successful from a
Sabhā). Thus, we see that the Ṛgveda is the earliest
original source where we may find casual references
to certain political ideas and institutions of ancient
India.
Other Early Original Sources
Another early original source for the compila-
tion of political terms is the Atharvaveda. An
interesting passage, which we may cite here, is that
where the already mentioned institutions, Sabhā
and Samiti are described as two sisters, being the
two daughters of Prajāpati: sabhā ca ma samiti-
ścāvatāṁ prajāpaterduhitarau samvidāne (Athar-
vaveda, 7.13) (May the Samiti and the Sabhā, the
two daughters of Prajāpati, concurrently aid me).
The Yajurveda has two broad divisions, viz.,
the White Yajurveda (Śuklayajurveda) and the
Black Yajurveda (Kṛṣṇa Yajurveda). The latter
one has three recensions (Śākhās), viz., Taittirīya
Samhitī, Maitrāyanī Samhitā and the Kaṭha or
(Kaṭhaka)-Saṁhitā. All these three recensions
are very important for our study because of con-
taining lists of the Ratnins or high functionaries
of the King of the Vedic age.
The Brāhmaṇa Literature as an Early Source
The Brāhmaṇa literature is still richer in respect
of socio-cultural data concerning ancient Indian</p>
<pb n="23" />
<p>political ideas and institutions. The Taittiriya
Brāhmaṇa, Satapatha Brahmana and the Aitareya
Brāhmaṇa contain details of the coronation cere-
mony, the Vajapeya ritual and the Aśvamedha
sacrifice. Aitareya Brāhmaṇa, I. 14, gives us the
earliest legend on the origin of Kingship. In the
same work we have the description of the royal
consecration under the title of Indra-mahābhiseka
(VIII.14 to VIII.19) which is a veritable feast for
the modern critical writers on ancient Indian polity
because of containing the very significant but
deluding terms like Bhaujya, Svārājya, Vairājya,
etc. From these more important Brāhmaṇas,
further informations can be gathered regarding the
topics like the relation between the ruler and the
ruled, the members of the royal family and their
position and the art of war in the contemporary
society.¹ The vedic literature comprising the
Samhitas and the Brāhmaṇas may be placed bet-
ween 1500 and 1000 B.C. or the lower limit may be
brought down by two or three centuries more.³
The Early Smritis or Dharmasutras
The early Smritis or Dharmasūtras like those
of Gautama, Apastamba, Vasistha, Baudhayana
and Visņu, which belong to a period between 600
and 100 B.C., also occupy an important position in
the study of ancient Indian politics. These works
throw light on the political ideals of the day by
way of defining the duties and responsibilities of
1. Basu, IAB. PP. 115-130.
2.
Ghoshal, HIPI, p. xxi.
3. Basham, The Wonder That was India, p. 81.</p>
<pb n="24" />
<p>Political Concepts in Ancient India
the King as the custodian of law and social order.
For example, according to Gautama (IX.9.10) the
King should lead back to the path of duty those
who have shunned it; according to Apastamba
(II.10.27. 18-19) the King should punish all those
who violate the duty of their respective order.
According to a general observation of Vișnu (III.3)
also, "the King should make the four castes and the
four orders observe their respective duties." Accord-
ing to Vasistha (XIX.7-8), the King should see
that the four castes remain engaged in their res-
pective duties and should punish them duly in case
of their default. These works are important as the
earliest sources of the State Law; they are also im-
portant because of giving us an idea of the relation
of Politics to Ethics. From these works we can
also gather an idea about the whole administrative
machinery, the King's executive, judicial and mili-
tary functions, and the duties, responsibilities
and desirable qualities of the officials like the
Mantri, Purohita, Amatya, Prāḍvivāka, etc.
4
The Pali Buddhist Canon
The Pali canonical works of the Buddhist
Sthavira vādins are divided into three "baskets"
(pitakas) or three major collections and they are,
viz., the Vinaya ("Conduct"), Sutta "(Sermon)"
and Abhidhamma ("Metaphysics") Pitakas. Each
of these three Pițakas are again divided into several
smaller works, which may be shown in the following
tabular order :
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="25" />
<p>Introduction
Tripitaka (The three Pitakas)
Vinaya Pitaka
Suttavi- Khandhaka Parivāra
bhanga
Mahavagga Cullavagga
Mahavibhanga Bhikkhuns
vibhanga
Sutta
Pitaka
5
Digitized by
Abhidhamma Pitaka
Consists of
books viz.,
1. Dhamma Samgani
2. Vibhanga
3. Dhätukatha
4. Puggalam
Panjati
5. Kathāvatthu
6. Yamaka
7. Pathani
Digha
Nika ya
Majjhima Samyutta
Nikaya Nikāya
The Khuddaka Nikaya contains fifteen books,
seven
Google
viz.
1. Khuddaka Patha, 2. Dhamma Pada, 3. Udana,
4. Itivuttaka, 5. Suttanipata, 6. Vimānavatthu, 7.
Petavatthu, 8. Therāgāthā, 9. Theṛugathā, 10. Jataka,
11. Nidesa, 12. Patisamvidha, 13. Apādani, 14. Bud-
dha-vamsa, 15. Dhamma Pitaka or Cariya Pitaka.
Anguttara Khuddaka
Nikaya Nikaya
This Tripitaka literature has been composed
between 400 and 300 B.C. In the context of our
present survey, the most important of the three
Pitakas is the Sutta Pitaka, which is divided into
five Nikayas (Groups) as follows:
(1) Dīgha (long) Nikaya, a collection of long
sermons ascribed to the Buddha, with
accounts of the circumstances in which
he preached them.
(2) Majjhima (medium) Nikaya, a collection
of shorter sermons,
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
MHC-tamİFÒCITY or untilan</p>
<pb n="26" />
<p>6
Political Concepts in Ancient India
(3) Samyutta (connected) Nikāya, brief ser-
mons on connected topics.
(4) Anguttara (Graduated) Nikaya, a collec-
tion of over 2,000 brief statements.
(5) Khuddaka (Minor) Nikaya, a collection
of miscellaneous works in prose and verse.
Of the fifteen books belonging to this
collection, the Jataka serves as the most
important source for a socio-cultural
history. The Jataka is a collection of over
500 poems containing folk-tales and other
stories. Now these poems, accompanied
by a prose commentary attributed to
Buddhaghosa, are together known as
the Jataka.
A section of the Digha Nikaya, III, called the
Aggañña Suttanta, gives us the Buddhist theory of
the origin of the King. According to the story given
in this work, originally in the human society there
was no king and no personal property. Later on, with
the growth of personal property there arose four
evils of theft, censure, lying and violence. Then the
human beings selected the most handsome and cap-
able person to become the King. The epithet Maha-
sammata, implies that he was the choice of all; he
was also called a Khattiya (Skt. Ksatriya) in the sense
that he was the lord of the fields. Another epithet
Rājā implies that the King used to gratify the
people by protecting their interest with righteous-
ness. In the various Jataka stories we get descriptions
of good and ideal Kings, the wrong ways of life which
they used to avoid, the ten royal duties (Rājadham-
ma) and the various aspects of good behaviour
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="27" />
<p>7
(Sila.) The Anguttara Nikāya, II, recounts the evil
consequences of a King's being unrighteous. The
Samyutta Nikāya, I, instructs as to how the King
should be guided by the sole principle of watchfulness
(appamādo). In a very important story of the
Jataka (i.e., the story No. 521), three wise birds are
giving instructions as to how a King should avoid
lying, anger and levity; should be energetic, should
protect one and all equally. One of the birds tells
about the ideal qualities of the ministers and other
officials, and a lot of duties and responsibilities
of the King, like his own personal attention in res-
pect of the royal income and expenditure. The
third bird tells about the powers or Balas of a King
and they are the power of arms (bahabala), the
power of wealth (bhogabala), the power of officials</p>
<p>(amaccabala), the power of high family (abhijaccabala)</p>
<p>and the power of wisdom (paññabala), which is the
chiefest of all. From the Digha Nikaya and the
Anguttara Nikaya we get an idea about the consti-
tution and working of the Samgha-or Gana-
Republics, as they tell us about the affairs of the
Republic of Vajjis in some detail. From the said
two Nikayas we also learn about the Buddhist con-
ception of the Cakkavatti (Skt. Cakravarti) or the
universal emperor.
Introduction
In some later works of Buddhist literature also
materials may be found for the study of ancient
Indian political ideas and institution. For ex-
ample, in the Sanskrit Mahāvastu we once again
have the theory of the origin of the Kingship and
also the concept of the King as the Mahasammata
or the choice of all. In the Suvarnaprabhasa-sūtra
of the Mahāyāna school, we find in Ch. XII, a
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
TEXE-HIKIKIPACITY or WAITAKA</p>
<pb n="28" />
<p>Political Concepts in Ancient India
discourse on the science of Politics (Rājaśāstra) in the
form of instructions given to a newly consecrated
son by a King. In the Pali Milinda Panha ("The
Questions of King Menander") the King puts a
question to the monk Nagasena as to how the
Buddha could be a Brāhmaṇa and a King at the
same time. In course of a reply to this question the
monk details the characteristics of a King. We
find materials also in the Buddhacarita and the
Saundarānanda, the two celebrated Kavyas of As-
vaghosa (1st Century B.C.), as in the second canto
of both these works there is the description of
King Suddhodanas' rule.
8
The Jaina Ācārănga Sutra
The most important Jaina work deserving men-
tion in the present context is the Acarangasūtra.
(Pkt. Ayaramga-Sutta). It is the first of the 12
Angas (Sections) or canonical texts of the Svetām-
bara school, finally settled and reduced to writing
at a council at Valabhī in Kathiawar in
454 A.D. In two lengthy sections it treats of the
way of life of a monk. The second section contains
a passage, which refers to a number of different
forms of government, viz., Arajya, Ganarājya,
Yuvarajya, Dvairājya, Vairājya and Viruddharājya,
the significance of which are discussed below in the
body of the glossary.
The Earliest Authority on Politics
In the source books mentioned above, we find
only casual references to political ideas and insti-
tutions. But there are reasons to believe that from
about the 8th or 7th century B.C. certain technical
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="29" />
<p>Introduction
works on the science of politics also began to be
written. Unfortunately, however, the
the earliest
treatises on politics are all lost. Of the technical
works which are now available to us is the Artha-
śāstra of Kautilya (4th century B.C.). We shall
see that the Rajadharma section of the Santi Parva
of the Mahabharata also can be said to be as good
as a regular treatise on the science of Polity.
Both these works refer to certain earlier theorists.
The first three verses of Santi Parva, 58, name
Brhaspati, Viśālakṣa (Śiva), Kavya
(Sukra),
Mahendra (Indra), Manu, Bharadvāja and Gaura-
śiras as writers on the science of Politics (rajaśāstra-
pranetārah). In the following canto (i.e., canto
59) of the Santi Parva we have the story that the
Creator (Svayambhu) with a view to instructing
the world in the means of avoiding anarchy and
unhappiness composed a colossal treatise in 100,000
chapters in which he dealt with Dharma, Artha and
Kāma (v. 29). An idea of the contents of the said
work is given in vv. 30-73. Then it is recounted
(in vv. 81 to 86) that Śiva first mastered the treatise
and then reduced its size to 10,000 chapters, and his
abridgement was known as Vaiśālākṣam. Indra
reduced its size to 5,000 chapters, and his version
came to be known as Bahudantaka. This was
reduced to 3,000 chapters by Brhaspati, and Sukra
4. etat te rajadharmāṇāṁ navanītam yudhisthira
brhaspatir hi bhagavān nāyyam dharmam prasamsati
viśālākṣaśca bhagavān kavyaś caiva mahātapaḥ
sahasrākṣo mahendraś ca tathā prācetaso manuḥ
bhāradvājaśca bhagavāṁstathā gauraśirā muniḥ
rājaśāstra praṇetāro brahmaṇyā brahmavādinaḥ
Digitized by
9
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
THE-MIAITANITryr or IAITIARKI</p>
<pb n="30" />
<p>Political Concepts in Ancient India
condensed it still further to a book of 1,000 chapters
only.
10
Kautilya in his Arthaśāstra very often finds an
occasion to refer to the views of several earlier
authorities on the subject, and they are, namely,
Viśālakṣa, Indra (Bāhudanta), Brhaspati, Sukra,
Manu, Bharad vāja, Gauraśiras, Parāśara, Pigūna
(Narada), Kaunapadanta, Vatavyadhi,
Ghota-
mukha, Katyāyana and Caranya. Kautilya refers
about a hundred times to yet another authority
with the honorific term Acarya, probably meaning
his own teacher," though he often disagrees with
this authority also. That these authors really
existed may be deduced from the fact that the
names of Viśālākṣa (Śiva), Indra (Bahudanta),
Brhaspati, Šukra, Manu, Bharadvāja, and Gaura-
siras are common to the lists given in both the
works, and that even now we have the works of
some of these authorities, if not in their original form,
at least in modified form, and they are namely, the
Manu Smrti. The Pārāśarasmriti, the Sukranīti
and the Brhaspatismriti (as reconstructed from
the quotations in other smriti works and com-
mentaries).
The Mahabharata
The Santi Parva of the Mahabharata is subdivided
5. Jolly (in his edition of the Arthaśāstra, 1923, II, p. 4)
takes the word to mean "previous teachers", and MM. P. V.
Kane interprets it as "the ancient authors of the śāstra collecti-
vely". But these meanings are not convincing. See K.V.
Rangaswami Aiyangar, Brhaspati-Smrti Introduction, p.
139 ff.
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="31" />
<p>Introduction
into three sections, viz., Rajadharma, Apaddharma
and Mokṣadharma. Of these, the first and the
foremost, i.e., the Rajadharma section itself com-
prises the first 130 cantos. It is as good as a regu-
lar technical treatise on Politics. But it assumes
the form of a more practical manual for the ad-
ministrator from the canto 55 onwards, when
Bhīşma begins a discourse on Polity before Yudhis-
thira. Some of the topics discussed in the Raja-
dharma section are as follows-Origin of Kingship
and the origin of the science of Polity, etc. (Ch. 59),
importance of the science of Politics (Ch.s 63-65),
duties and responsibilities of the King (Ch.s 55-57,
70, 76, 94, 96, 120, etc.), duties and responsibilities
of different ministers (Ch.s 73, 82, 83, 85, 115, 118),
the tax-system (Ch.s 71,76, 87, 88, 120, 130), internal
administration (Ch. 87), foreign policy, peace and
war (Ch.s 80, 87, 99, 100-103, 110, 113) testing of
ministers (Ch. 82), importance of secrecy and place
of counsel (Ch. 83), etc. There are certain striking
similarities of topics treated in the Santi Parva
with those treated in the Arthaśāstra and the Manu
Samhita. For example, the Ch. 88 reminds us of
Aarthaśāstra, V.2, which is styled "Kośabhi sam-
haraṇam". Ch. 83 is very similar to Arthaśāstra.
I.15, called Mantradhikara. It is interesting that
the following verse of the Santi Parva occurs also
in the Arthaśāstra, I.15 (Verse 3) and the Manu
Samhita, VII.105 with insignificant differences in
reading. Cf.
7
6. tatra tävacchāntau rājadhārmā-paddharma-mokşadharmā-
khyāḥ kāṇḍāsṭrayah-(Nilakantha's Com. on Santi Parva. I.1).
Digitized by
11
7. Cf. Yadā rājā samarthopi kośārthi syān mahā mate
Katham pravarteta tada tanme brūhi pitāmaha (śānti Parva, 88.1).
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="32" />
<p>12
Political Concepts in Ancient India
nāsya cchidraṁ paraḥ paśyecchidreşu param anvi-
yāt guhet kurma ivāngāni rakṣed vivaram ātmanaḥ
(Śānti Parva, 83.49).
Apart from the Sānti Parva, there are also some
other places of the Mahabharata where we find
certain very important materials. For example,
Sabha Parva, Ch. 5 gives an idea of an ideal admi-
nistration. In Vana Parva (Ch.s 25, 32, 33 and
150) and also in the Sabha Parva (Ch. 32) we find
discussions on the royal policy to be followed in an
emergent situation. In a verse of the Maha-
bhārata itself it is rightly claimed that the great
epic may be called a Dharmaśāstra, a Kāmaśāstra
and an Arthasāstra (a science of Polity) as well.
Compare :
Arthaśāstram idam proktam dharmaśāstram idam
mahat
Kamaśāstram idam proktam vyāsenāmitabuddhinā
The Arthasastra of Kautilya
The Arthasastra is the greatest name in the
history of Indian political literature. It is the most
practical and most comprehensive treatise on state-
craft. This work is attributed to Kautilya, the
famous minister of Candragupta Maurya (4th
century B.C.). On the ground that "the text re-
fers to people and places (notably China) which do
not seem to have been known to the Indians in the
4th century B.C.", and because of certain other
internal evidences it is believed to be a later work of
8. Basham, The Wonder That was India, pp. 50, 79,
Digitized by
(Mahābhārata, I.2.384).
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="33" />
<p>Introduction
c 4th century A.D. But we shall be more justified
to take the questionable passages to be interpola-
tions and to conclude that the book is substantially
a composition of Kautilya, the Mauryan minister
himself.
While the Mahabharata teaches Politics as a part
of moral training, the Arthasāstra serves as a
practical guide to statecraft. Its main concern
is the well-being of the state and the material pros-
perity of the King. Though the King is expected
to master the Vedas and philosophy by the Artha-
śāstra also, it does not bother about ethical rigidities
so far as political and administrative policies are
concerned. It comprises 15 Books (Adhikaraṇas),
each containing some smaller chapters (Adhyāyas).
In another manner the Adhikaranas are divided
into smaller sections or Prakaranas. Thus in the
whole work we have some 150 Adhyayas or some
180 Prakaranas.¹0⁰ The contents of the Arthaśāstra
may be briefly indicated as follows:
Book I
Book III
Book IV
13
Book II Settlement of the countryside and
fortification; duties and responsibi-
lities of various officers connected with
civil administration.
-Training of the King, testing of offi-
cials, personal security of the King,
secrecy of counsels, etc.
Digitized by
} Civil, criminal and personal law.
9. Basham, Ibid., p. 79. Altekar, SGAI. p., 15.
10. In the Glossary, the Roman numbers indicate the Book
no.s and ordinary Arabic numerals indicate the Chap no.s.
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
THE TRAINIEDOITY- AC SUMBAINI</p>
<pb n="34" />
<p>14
Book V
Political Concepts in Ancient India
-Secret assassinations, means of in-
creasing the royal coffer, payment of
officials, etc.
Book VI -Nature and function of the seven ele-
ments of the state; the circle of allied
and enemy Kings.
Book VII -The six modes of foreign policy.
Book VIII-The probable calamities of the State.
Book IX-Problems connected with aggression.
Book X-The art and organisation of war.
Book XI -Policy towards the Samgha-republics.
Book XII-Policy towards the weaker foreign Kings.
Book XIII-Means of occupying the enemy fort.
Book XIV-Application of poison and other secret
elements to harm the enemy, wonderful
and delusive contrivances, application
of medicine and charms, remedies
against the injuries of the own army.
Book XV-Paragraphical divisions of the treatise
and explanation of the methodology
of the treatment of the subject.
The style of the composition of this most com-
prehensive technical work on politics is somewhat
similar to the works of Apastamba, Baudhayana
and other Sutra writers. In the concluding verse
of the Arthasastra, the author says that he has
composed his own Sutras and commentary. The
Sutras, meant by him are probably the enigmatical
titles or the initial lines of each chapter, the text
of the chapters being the commentary on the res-
pective titles, or the initial lines." There are cer-
11. Shamasastry, Arthasastra, Translation, Introduction,
p. xx.
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="35" />
<p>Introduction
tain summary verses in the body of the chapters.
Most of them seem to be his own, while some might
have been taken from some earlier source. "Many
of the words used in the Arthasāstra are now obso-
lete, and a few violate the canons of Panini".12
The Works of Manu and Yājňavalk ya
The Smrti works of Manu and Yajñavalkya are
another two very important works as original
sources. The Manu Smrti (also called Manu Sam-
hita) was written between 200 B.C. and 200 A.C.
while the Yajnavalkya Smrti was composed bet-
ween 100 and 300 A.C. In chapters VII, VIII and
IX of the Manu Smrti we have discussions on
duties and responsibilities of the King, functions
of the different officers, the theories and principles
concerning foreign policy, and civil and criminal
law. At times these discussions seem to be a sum-
marisation of what is given in the Mahābhārata
and the Arthaśāstra. Yajnavalkya discusses rāja-
dharma (i.e., the total duty of the King) in section
13 of Ch. I. Whole of the Ch. II, comprising 25 sec-
tions, in the Yājñavalkya Smṛiti is a treatise on civil
and criminal law.
15
It is to be noted here that according to the doc-
trine of these Smṛtis, duties for each and every one
of the four Varnas remain well defined. Any
breach in the limits of duties constitutes an offence.
"For every offence there is both a civil penalty and
a purification, and without both, one is not absolved
from the effects of the offence". That is why, in
18
12. Shamasastry, loc cit.
13. K.V. Rangaswami Aiyangar, Brhaspati Smrti, Preface,
p. 11.
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="36" />
<p>these Smṛiti works, we have chapters on both Prāyś-
citta (expiatory rituals) and Vyavahāra (legal pro-
cedure). The treatment of civil and criminal laws
and also an outline of the social order should in-
variably find a place in an ancient treatise on politics
because, "the Indian King was the custodian of
social order, and he was expected to see that every-
one in the Kingdom kept to the track laid down
for him by the śāstras. He had therefore to be well
posted in the knowledge of everyone's duty, be-
sides knowing his own, both as a Kṣatriya and a
King".[^14]
In the present survey mention should be made
also of Medhātithi (825 to 900 A.C.) and Kulluka
(12th C.A.C.) for their very informative and intelli-
gent commentaries on the Manu Smṛti. Likewise,
the Bālakrīḍā of Viṣvarūpa (9th C.A.C.) and the
Mitākṣarā of Vijñāneśvara (12th C.A.C.) are very
useful for understanding the work of Yājñavalkya.
Kāmandakīya Nītisāra
The Kāmandakīya Nītisāra is another technical
work on the science of Politics. This work was
most probably composed in the Gupta age around
500 A.C. The title implies that the work contains
the principles of politics propounded by Kamanda,
an ancient master. But in fact, it is a compilation
of the theories laid down in the Mahābhārata and
the Arthaśāstra by some unknown scholar who was
posterior to Kauṭilya. This author has great
[^14] K. V. Rangaswami Aiyangar, Bṛhaspati Smṛti, Preface,
p. 11.</p>
<pb n="37" />
<p>admiration for Kauṭilya. He pays homage to the
illustrious Viṣṇugupta (Kauṭilya) who churned up
the nectar in the form of the science of politics
(Nītiśāstra) from the ocean of Arthaśāstra (i.e., the
vast lore of Politics).[^15] This is in reality a summary
of the work of Kautilya in verse form. Except
Kauṭilya's treatment of the republican form of
government and civil, criminal and personal law,
almost everything that we have in the Arthaśāstra
is reproduced here in a summarised verse form con-
venient for memorisation.
Other Technical Works on Politics
The Śukranīti, stuffed with varied and some-
times new informations on duties of the King, func-
tions of officials, foreign policy and art of war,
civil and judicial administration, etc., is most pro-
bably a work of the 11th or the 12th century A.D.
The Nītivākyāmṛta of Somadeva (10th C.A.D.) is
an electic work based generally on old authorities.
Politics is elaborately discussed along with other
aspects of Dharma in several works like the Abhilaṣi-
tārthacintāmaṇi of Someśvara (1331 A.D.), Yukti-
kalpataru of Bhoja (1025 A.D., Rājanītikalpataru
of Lakṣmīdhara (1125 A.D.), Rājan<error>īit</error><fix>īti</fix>kāṇḍa of
Devanabhaṭṭa (c. 1300 A.D.), Rājanītiratnākara
of Caṇdeśvara (c. 1325 A.D.), Nītimayūkha of Nīla-
kaṇṭha (c. 1625 A.D.), Rājanītiprakāsa of Mitramiśra
(c. 1650 A.D.) and the Manasollāsa of the Cālukyan
King Someśvara (1125-1138 A.D.), which is more
[^15] nītiśāstrāmṛtaṁ śrīmān arthaśāstra mahodadheḥ ya
uddadhre namastasmai viṣnuguptāya vedhase (Kāman-
dakīya Nītisāra. I.6).</p>
<pb n="38" />
<p>18
Political Concepts in Ancient India
of the nature of an extensive guide book for the
rulers.
Other Original Sources
The Purāṇas are usually encyclopaedic in their
contents. Hence, it is no wonder that just as some
Purāṇas deal with Poetics (Alaṁkāra), some also
deal with the theories of state and government.
For example we have discussion on Politics in
Agnipurana (Ch.s 218-42), Matsyapurana (Ch.s
215-43), Garuḍapurāṇa (Ch.s 108-115), Mārkaṇḍeya-
purāṇa (Ch. 24), and Kālikāpurāṇa (Ch.s 87, 88).
But whatever we have in these Puranas is only a
repetition of the contents of the Santi Parva or the
Arthaśāstra or the Manu Samhita and the Kaman-
dakiya Nītisāra.
In the Rāmāyaṇa also we have a lot of materials
relating to ancient Indian political ideas and insti-
tutions. Though the principal sentiment of the
Rāmāyaṇa is Karuṇa (Pathos), yet it has Kings and
Princes as heroes and describes a great deal of
diplomacy and political organisation. Hence, the
Rāmāyaṇa also serves as an important source. The
Sanskrit court epics are expected to have either the
Erotic (Śrngāra) or the Heroic (Vira) as the principal
sentiment. The basic stories are also often taken from
Itihāsas or the two great epics. Thus, in the Kavyas
having Vīra as the principal sentiment we invariably
have a canto or two devoted to discussion on politics.
The first two cantos of the Kirātārjunīya and the
second canto of the Sisupalavadha are the most
handy examples. Similar is the case with the
Mudrārākşasa of Visakhadatta,
dramas like the
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="39" />
<p>Introduction
which is the most political of the dramas, and the
Venisamhāra of Bhaṭṭanārāyaṇa. Apart from these,
mention may be made of the Raghuvamsa and the
Malavikāgnimitra of Kalidasa, Kadambari and the
Harşacarita of Bāṇabhaṭṭa, Daśakumāracarita of
Dandin, Rajatarangini of Kalhana and the Panca-
tantra and the Hitopadeśa, which contain a profuse
quantity of socio-cultural data including those on
politics. About the South Indian forms of govern-
ment and political ideas we get occasional references
in the literary works like the Tirukkural and the
Silappadikaram.
19
Apart from books, the rock and copper plate
inscriptions also contain a lot of material. These
inscriptions often 'represent the actual state of
affairs in the government machinery of the different
administrations'.16 From these inscriptions we may
learn about the designations and the duties and
responsibilities of the various government officials,
relation between the King and his cabinet or the
popular assembly, territorial divisions, different
kinds of tax and levies, etc., etc.
Aspects of Ancient Indian Political Life and
Thought
The survey of the original sources made above
should suffice to indicate that the ancient works
concerning politics cover a vast field and varied
aspects of political life and thought. Technical
works like the Arthaśāstra or the Kamandakıya
Nitisāra were composed as text books for the train-
ing and guidance of the Kings. Hence the technical
16. Altekar, SGAI, p. 24.
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="40" />
<p>works deal with all the aspects of a King's adminis-
tration and diplomatic policy. The Arthaśāstra
of Kauṭilya presents us the most comprehensive
list of items that should generally find place in a
treatise on politics. Apart from the topics dealt
with in the Arthaśāstra, a work like the Śānti Parva
also raises a question as to how the institution of
Kingship originated.
Thus, for the purpose of compiling and studying
the ancient Indian political terms we have to ex-
amine and explore the various aspects of ancient
Indian political life and thought as depicted in the
corpus of literature surveyed above, and those
various aspects may be indicated in broad outlines
as follows:
The original state of anarchy and the origin of
the King and government.
The concept of the State--the various constituent
elements of the State (traditionally called Aṅgas
or Prakṛtis)-the territory and its division into
the town and the countryside.
The various forms of government-republican
and monarchical forms--the Saṁgha or Gana
republics.
The popular assemblies in a monarchical form of
government--limits of the authority of the King.
The different degrees of the supremacy of the
King--the Emperor--the ordinary independent
ruler--the feudatories, etc.
The royal consecration and other royal festivals
and rituals.</p>
<pb n="41" />
<p>Introduction
Public administration and the designation and
functions of administrative officers in an average
monarchical form of government.
21
Public finance-various sources of revenue-
principles of taxation and various forms of tolls
and levies-the schedule of pay and emoluments
to be paid to dignitaries and officials.
Judicial administration-civil, criminal and
personal laws-various offences and their punish-
ments.
Foriegn policy-the theory of the circles of allied
and enemy Kings.
Espionage and the functions of the emissaries.
The principles of aggression, treaty and
neutrality.
Military organisation-varieties of the army-
branches of the army-training of the men and
animals and the art of war-various weapons
and accessories fortification and details of
action.
The Scope of the Present Glossary
L.M. Harrod in the Introduction of his work,
The Librarians' Glossary, defines Glossary as "an
alphabetical list of abstruse, obsolete, unusual,
technical, dialectical or other terms concerned with
a subject field, together with definitions". In the
light of the subject field relating to ancient Indian
Politics, indicated above, the present Glossary also is
expected to contain the technical terms pertaining
to all the above aspects and as found in the whole
literature surveyed earlier. But the present work is
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="42" />
<p>prepared as a Ph.D. dissertation, and hence,
the technical terms had to be culled from a literature
extending only up to the 7th century A.D., at the
instance of the Ph.D. Committee. Hence, a techni-
cal term, when it occurs only in a late work like the
Śukranīti, is usually not included in the present
Glossary, unless it is anticipated by a term found
in a work that falls within our time-limit. Sometimes,
however, even a later work or later epigraphical
record is cited only to show the continuation of the
use of the term from earlier times. It should be
candidly expressed here that it is difficult to draw
a clear line of demarcation between the ordinary
dictionary words and the technical terms. Yet
we have taken as much care as possible to sort out
only such terms which are "abstruse, obsolete, un-
usual, technical and dialectical." Though judicial
administration forms a part of the King's duty,
yet we feel that the legal terms have an identity of
their own. Hence, we have included only a limited
number of terms pertaining to the judicial aspect of
ancient Indian politics. The ancient Indian legal
terms, themselves may form an independent Glos-
sary. The treatment of military organisation and
the art of war is so elaborate that we can afford to
include the terms relating only to the major cate-
gories without going into the hair-splitting details.
We feel that there may be an independent full
length Glossary also of the ancient Indian military
terms. It is, however, regretted that in the present
work, it could not be found convenient to include
the terms found in the south Indian literature.</p>
<pb n="43" />
<p>Introduction
The Utility of the Present Glossary
A study of the ancient Indian political ideas
and institutions forms an indispensable part of the
cultural history of India. Hence, for the whole
community of the students of Indology, ancient
Indian polity has a sustained interest. The Indians,
particularly, may highly be benefited by a fami-
liarity with the ancient political wisdom. That
Dr. K. P. Jayaswal's writings overstressing the
democratic element in the ancient Indian way of
life, in the pre-independence days worked as a source
of inspiration to the Indians in their struggle for
freedom is rightly observed by as great a savant
as Prof. A. L. Basham." Prof. Basham, however,
observes also that there was a great disadvantage
of undue reliance on the pedantic theory or ancient
tradition.¹8 But even for a rejection of the tra-
ditional theory, we must first examine it with the
same amount of meticulous care as is obtained
in case of the pedantic theory itself. "Professor
F. W. Thomas in 1937 in reply to an address
of welcome given by professors of Sanskrit
College, Calcutta, predicted that India would achieve
her political freedom in no time and the future
rulers of India would be able to conduct the Indian
23
17. Cf. "Such patriotic scholars as Dr. K.P. Jayaswal, writing
when India's independence had not been achieved, did much to
give her people faith in themselves, and therefore may have
served a practical purpose". (The Wonder that was India, p. 110.)
18. Cf. "The kingdoms of medieval Hindu-India...were quite
incapable of withstanding the Turks, whose military science
was not overburdened by pedantic theory or ancient tradition".</p>
<p>(Ibid., p. 136.)</p>
<p>Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="44" />
<p>nation along the safe course of activities if they
guided themselves by the light of the political
wisdom enshrined in the Mahābhārata", ob-
served Professor Satkari Mookerjee in a paper
published in 1959. Satkari Mookerjee, "Political Wisdom of Ancient India",
Journal of the Bihar Research Society, Vol. XXXXV, parts I-IV,
December, 1959. That was at a time when India
had friendly relations with China. But by ap-
plying the ancient Indian political theory, it appears
that, Professor Mookerjee could make a prediction
about the Indo-China conflict that took place some
three years later in 1962, as he observed, "To add
further fuel to the fire, China has become our imme-
diate neighbour (bhūmyanantara) by overrunning
Tibet. She seems inebriated with power.... India
has to become militarily powerful enough in order
to inspire a feeling of healthy regard for her terri-
tory". Ibid,
Thus the study of the ancient Indian political
wisdom has great significance, even in the present
age. The utility of the study of ancient Indian
political literature itself suffices to establish the utility
of the present Glossary. In this Glossary an attempt
is made to present an authentic and scientifically
prepared index to the technical terms of the vast and
extensive original literature on ancient Indian poli-
tical life and thought. Such a systematic index is
expected to be useful in view of the following
factors.
(a) There are certain such ideas for each of
which we have more than one technical</p>
<pb n="45" />
<p>Introduction
25
term. For example, the 'Science of poli-
tics' itself is called by different names.
Kautilya in Arthaśāstra, XV calls it artha-
śāstra.
(cf. Dharmam artham ca kamaṁ ca pravar-
tyati
pāti ca adharman arthavidveṣān 'idam
sastram' nihanti ca).
In Mahābhārata, xii. 56, 3-4, etc. it is called
rājadharma.
(cf. sarvasya jivalokasya 'rājadharmaḥ' parā-
yaṇam)
In Sukranītisāra, 1.4 it is called nītiśāstra.
(cf. Krivaikadeśabodhini śāstranyanyāni
santi hi sarvopajivakaṁ lokasthitikṛīnnīti-
sāstrakam'...)
(b) There are certain terms which have more
than one implication. For example the
term rājadharma has the following impli-
cations :
(i) rajadharma-The whole duty of the
King' according to the old Smriti con-
cept and the Mahabharata.
(ii) rājadharma=The ten royal duties of an
ideal king according to the Buddhist
tradition as we have it in the Jataka
stories.</p>
<p>(c) The implication of a term like rājan (=rājā)</p>
<p>varied from time to time and from place
to place.
(i) raja-The chosen leader of the people
(Mahasammata) "who gratifies (ranja-
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="46" />
<p>yati) the others according to dhamma"
(vide Dīgha Nikāya, Vol. III, pp. 92-93).
(ii) rājā=The leader of the battle (vide
Aitareya Brāhmaṇa. I.14).
(iii) rājā=A vassal king or even a smaller
vassal king in relation to the paramount
rulers assuming the titles like mahārājā,
rājātirāja and mahārājādhirāja as was
the vogue by the Gupta age.
(iv) rājā=A term applied to the Heads of the
families capable of taking part in the
tribal assemblies constituting the non-
monarchical republics of the Buddhist
tradition.
(v) rājan=The term has been used in
Northern India (Āryāvārtta) to mean
any one engaged in the ruling function
(vide Kumārīla on Mīmāṁsāsūtra, II.
3.2).
(vi) rājan=The term used to be applied
even to governors of districts (māṇḍali-
kas), appointed to their posts by some
paramount ruler. (Kumārila in the
same context of the Mīmāṁsāsūtra).
(vii) rājan=The people of Andhra, as re-
corded by Śabara, and the people
of Dravida, as recorded by Kumārila
'applied the title to all Kshatriyas
irrespective of their exercise of the
ruling function or not'.
(d) In view of the divergent implications, an
attempt is made in the Glossary to point</p>
<pb n="47" />
<p>Introduction
out precisely the respective contexts for the
various implications of each term and care
is taken to correlate the various terms
having a common implication.
(e) The Glossary is expected to make the reading
of the original texts more convenient in
several ways. One interesting example as
to how a Glossary may help is that the term
Pūrvasāhasadanda is used in the Artha-
sastra as early as in the first chapter of
Book III, and severally in the subsequent
chapters; whereas, it is defined for the first
time only as late as in the 17th chapter of
Book III. Similar is the case with the
terms like Madhyamsāhasadaṇḍa and
Uttamasāhasadaṇḍa.
27
The Technical Form of the Glossary
The academic interest involved in this investi-
gation is the same as what is obtained in case of
following similar works, viz.
(1) D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary,
1966.
(2) L. M. Harrod, The Librarians' Glossary, 1971.
(3) J. E. Cirlot, A Dictionary of Symbols,
(English translation from the Spanish
original), 1962.</p>
<p>(5)</p>
<p>(4) S. C. Banerji, A Glossary of Smrti Literature,
1963.
E. Gerow, A Glossary of Indian Figures of
Speech, Mouton Publishers, 1971.
(6) Macdonell and Keith, Vedic Index of Names
and Subjects, Varanasi, 1958.
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="48" />
<p>These works with their respective distinctive
features have served as very good models for the
present Glossary. But finally the treatment of the
terms has taken a shape more akin to that of the
Vedic Index.
For arranging the terms alphabetically, they are
first transliterated and then arranged in the order
of an usual Sanskrit Dictionary. For the alphabe-
tical arrangement, the compound words are also
treated as single words, and the derivatives are
treated as independent words.
Barring a few exceptions like ratnin, the words
ending in -an and -in are given in nom. singular
form. Thus instead of mantrin we have mantrī.
The term Mantri-Pariṣad occurs earlier than Mantrī
because of the i being short due to the compound.
Whenever there is an anusvāra, it is treated as a
conjunction of m with the following consonant.</p>
<pb n="49" />
<p>GLOSSARY
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="50" />
<p>Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="51" />
<p>AKṚTA--(KṢETRA) A piece of waste or unculti-
vated land (AŚ. II.1). Kautilya suggests that
anybody who would bring such a land under
cultivation would not have to lose its ownership.
cf; akṛtāni kartṛbhyo nādeyāt (AŚ. II.1).
AKṚTYA--Contented subjects who are not liable
to be won over by the enemy with any propa-
ganda (AŚ. I.13, I.14).
AKṢAPAṬALA--A depository of royal documents
and account books. (vide AŚ. II.7).
AKṢAPATALĀDHYAKṢA—(1) The officer in
charge of the depository of the royal docu-
ments and the account books. The duties
and responsibilities of this executive officer
are described by Kauṭilya in AŚ. II.7. The
officer is, however, referred to as Adhyakṣa,
but the references being in the context of
the Akṣapaṭala (q.v.), we take the term
Adhyakṣa to be an abbreviation of the
more relevant term Akṣapaṭalādhyakṣa. See, Sircar, Glossary, p. 14 and Kane, HD. III. p. 143.
(2) Same as Mahākṣapaṭalika (Superintendent
of records and accounts), often given in
the inscriptional records. See, Altekar, SGAI, p. 199, Sircar, Ibid., p. 178.
AKṢAVĀPA--(1) One of the eleven Ratnins (q.v.).
(2) From akṣa (meaning dice) the present term</p>
<pb n="52" />
<p>is presumed to mean the King's companion
at the game table.
(3) But it seems to be more reasonable to take
this term to be analogous to Akṣapatalā-
dhyakṣa of AŚ II.7. While, Saṁgrahitā,
the seventh of the Ratnins,cor responds to
Sannidhātā of the fifth ch. of AŚ bk. II,
and Bhāgadhuk, the eighth of the Ratnins
corresponds to Samāhartā of the sixth ch.
of AŚ bk. II, it is quite likely that Akṣavāpa
the ninth of the Ratnins corresponds to the
Akṣapaṭalādhyakṣa, given in the very next
ch., i.e., ch. 7 of AŚ bk. II.
(4) As equivalent to Akṣapaṭalādhyakṣa, the
present term means the Superintendent of
the depository of the royal records and
accounts.
AGRAHĀRA--Rent free land donated to brāh-
maṇas. Vide Bobbili C.P. Inscription of Achaṇḍavarman, lines 6, 7.13. This term is often suffixed to the
names of the villages or localities donated by the
Kings as in the name Mayurasalmala-Agra-
hara in the Nidhanpur C.P. Grant of Bhaskara-
varman. (lines 50f). P. N. Bhattacharyya, Kamarupaśasanavali, pp. 16 f.
ATAVIRAJYA-Kingdoms of the forest region.
From inscriptional evidences these Forest King-
doms seem to have been small but sovereign
states mainly belonging to central India. The
powerful Kings often took pride in subduing the
forest Kingdoms. (See Atavikarāja). In the</p>
<pb n="53" />
<p>Khoh C.P. Inscription of Saṁkṣobha (529 A.D.)
and the Kanas Plate of Loka vigraha (Ep. Ind.
XXXVIII, p. 331) we find references to 18 Aṭavīrājyas.        sāṣṭadaśāṭavīrājyabhyantaraṁ ḍadbhālā rājyaṁ...(line 8).                                   tosalyāṁ sāṣṭādaśāṭavīrājyāyāṁ
(vide D.C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 395).
ATI-SANDHI--If a certain treaty (Sandhi) results
in a greater gain of wealth (Hiraṇya) land
(Bhūmi), etc. than anticipated in time of the
mutual agreement, the treaty is called an Ati-
sandhi. (AŚ VII.9).
ATYAYA--A fine or penalty. It is one of the seven
Āyamukhas or sources of royal income (AŚ II. 6).
Such a fine is often realised in the form of a
deduction of pay and other emoluments of state
employees. (See the expression Atyayasthāna
in AŚ II.32)
ADHIKĀRI MAHATTARA(S)--see Mahattarā-
dhikārins.
ADHIPĀLA--A registrar of pledges or mortgages
(AŚ III.12).
ADHIRĀJA--A King with supremacy over a
number of  feudatories. (cf. Basham, The
Wonder that was India, p. 94).
ADHIVINNĀ--A woman whose husband marries
a second wife. (Yājñavalkya, I. 73, 74; Manu
Saṁ IX. 83; AŚ III.2).
ADHIVEDANAM--Marrying of a second wife in
presence of the earlier wife. cf. adhivedanaṁ
bhāryāntaraparigrahaḥ (Mitakṣarā on Yājña-
valkyasmṛti I.73).</p>
<pb n="54" />
<p>ADHIVEDANIKA--A compensation given to the
first wife by her husband on his marrying another
woman. (AŚ III. 2, Yājñavalkya II.143, 148).
ĀJĪVA--A profession or source of income. (AŚ III.
12).
ĀBHIGĀMIKA--(GUṆAS)—(1) Certain attractive
qualities which make the King dear to his
subjects. These qualities are enumerated by
Kauṭilya in AŚ VI.1, and they are as follows:
The King should be Mahākulīna (of high birth),
Daivasampanna (endowed with the merits of
the previous birth), Buddhisampanna (endowed
with intelligence), Sattvasampanna (endowed
with steadiness), Bṛddhadarśī, (prepared
to listen to the old men), Dhārmika (pious),
Satyavāk (truthful), Avisaṁyādaka (keeping
conformity of deeds with words), Kṛtajña
(grateful for good done by others), Sthūlalakṣā
(highly generous), Mahotsāha (highly enthu-
siastic), Adīrghasūtra (prompt in action), Śakya-
sāmanta (capable of keeping vessels in control),
Dṛḍhabuddhi (firm in determination), Akṣudra-
pariṣatka (having a sufficiently large council
of ministers) and Vinayakāma (a lover of
politeness). There is an alternative reading Dṛḍhabhakti (firmly devoted) supported also by the list given by Kāmandaka.
(2) Kāmandaka gives these qualities in verse
form as follows:-
kulaṁ sattvaṁ vayaḥ śīlaṁ dākṣiṇyaṁ
kṣiprakāritā
avisaṁvāditā satyaṁ vṛddhasevā kṛtajñatā
daivasampannatā buddhirakṣudraparivāratā</p>
<pb n="55" />
<p>śakyasāmantatā caiva tathā ca dṛḍhabhaktitā
dīrghadarśitvam utsāhaḥ śucitā sthūlalakṣatā
vinītatā dhārmikatā guṇāḥ sādhvabhigāmikāḥ
guṇairetair upetaḥ san suvyaktam abhigam-
yate
tathā tu kurvīta yathā gacchellokābhigamyatām
(Kāṁandakīyaṅītisāra, IV. 6-9).
(3) Bhāskara varman, the Kāmarūpa King of
7th Century A.D., is said to have been duly
endowed with the Ābhigāmika qualities with
which he proved his love for the subjects
and could fully possess the royal fortune of
Kāmarūpa. Cf. nirantarapraṇayarasabhar-
ākṛṣṭa-Kāmarūpalakṣmīsamāliṁganaprakați-
tābhigāmika guṇānurāgavṛtti (Nidhanpur
C.P. Grant of Bhaskaravarman, lines 44). Vide, Kāmarūpaśāsanāvalī, p. 16.
ABHITYAKTA--The awardee of a death sentence.
(AŚ V.2).
ABHIŚAPTA--An accused person (AŚ IV. 8).
ABHIŚĀPA--A serious charge or accusation as in
Yājñavalkyasmṛti 2. 99 (nṛpārtheṣvabhiśāpe ca
vaheyuḥ śucayaḥ sadā). Cf. Mitäkṣarā Com. there-
on, where abhiśāpe=mahāpātakābhiyoge.
ABHIṢEKA--Royal consecration ceremony. The
procedure of the performance of this ceremony
is given in detail in Śatapatha-Brāhmaṇa, V,
Taittirīya Brāhmaṇa, I. 7. 5, ff. and Aitareya
Brāhmaṇa, VIII. 5 ff. Abhiṣeka is an essential
part of the Rājasūya or sacrifice of royal in-</p>
<pb n="56" />
<p>auguration, being the second of its component
members. (see Vedic Index, Vol. I, p. 28).
ANARTHA-TRIVARGA--Anartha (loss of wealth
or misfortune), Adharma (lack of piety) and
Śoka (sorrow) taken together are called Anartha-
trivarga, (AŚ IX. 7). anartho'dharmaśśoka ityanartha-trivargah.
ANAVASITA-SANDHI--Literally 'an indeter-
minate treaty'. A Sandhi involving an agree-
ment of both the parties for colonisation of waste
lands. This Sandhi is called so because there
are innumerable ways of colonisation as detailed
in AŚ VII. 11.
ANĪKASTHA--(1) An elephant trainer (AŚ II. 2,
II.31 etc.).
(2) An armed bodyguard or the host of body-
guards of the King. (rakṣivargastvanīkasthaḥ,
Amarakośa, Kṣatriya varga).
ANUTTHĀNA--The opposite of Utthāna (q.v.)
ANUŚAYA--A dispute in respect of a sold or pur-
chased article. (AŚ III. 15).
ANTAPĀLA--One of the 18 Mahāmātras or Tīrthas.
He used to be in charge of a border fort called
Antapāladurga. His pay is said to have been
12000 Paṇas per annum (AŚ V. 3). His duty
was to collect road tolls and to look after the
upkeep of the road and its safety. Vide, Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 108.  (AŚ VIII. 4).
ANTAPĀLADURGA--A border fort situated on
the common margin of two adjacent Janapadas
(AŚ II. 1). It remains under the charge of a</p>
<pb n="57" />
<p>Mahāmātra or Tīrtha called Antapāla. A court
of justice under a Dharmastha is also stationed
in this Antapāladurga as indicated by the ex-
pression Janapadasandhi in AŚ III. 1.
ANTARAMĀTYAKOPA--Antagonism towards the
King on the part of any one of the closely as-
sociated Amātyas other than the Mantrī, the
Purohita, the Yuvarāja and the Senāpati. (AŚ
IX. 3). mantryādi-varjanamantaramātyānām anyatamakopo'ntar-
amātya-kopah.
ANTARDHI--A weak king who stands (geographi-
cally) in between the Vijigīṣu (aggressor) and
his Ari (enemy). He is called so, because when-
ever there is any offence from any strong power,
he conceals himself in either a fort or a forest.
Vide, AŚ VII. 13. antarnetuśca madhyastho durbalontardhirucyate pratighāte
balavato durgāṭavyapasāravān.
ANTARVAMŚIKA--(1) Chief of the guards of the
harem.
(2) One of the 18 Mahāmātras or Tīrthas. (AŚ
I. 12).
(3) His yearly pay is fixed by Kauṭilya at 24000
panas. (AŚ V. 3.)
ANTAḤPURA--Royal female apartments.
ĀNVĪKṢIKĪ-- (1) Medhātithi on Manusaṁ. VII. 43
says that the term may mean either Tarkavidyā
(i.e., logic or the science of reasoning) or Ātmavi-
dyā (i.e., metaphysics). Offering a third alterna-
tive he says that Ānvīksikī may be another name
for Ātmavidyā (metaphysics) and Manu mentions</p>
<pb n="58" />
<p>the latter only by way of qualifying the
former. traividyebhyastrayīm vidyāt daṇḍanītiṁ ca śāvatīm ānvīk-
ṣikīṁ cātmavidyāṁ vārtārambhaṁs'ca lokatha (Manu Saṁ VII.43).
evam ānvīkṣikyapi tarkavidyā arthas' āstrādikā, ātmavidyā 'dhyā-
tmavidyā vis'eṣaṇa viseṣye vā pade (Medhatithi on above).
(2) In Gautama Dharma Sūtra, XI. 2 it is said to
form the curriculum of studies for the King
along with Trayī (i.e., the three Vedas).
(3) In AS' I. 1 it is one of the four main sciences
(vidyās), while the other three are Trayi,
Vārtā (Economics and Commerce) and
Daṇḍanīti.
(4) Kauṭilya observes that Saṁkhya, Yoga and
Lokāyata philosophies come under the pur-
view of Ānvīkṣikī. sāṁkhyaṁ yogo lokāyataṁ cetyānvīkṣikī.  According to Kauṭilya,
Ānvīkṣikī is a lamp to illumine all other
sciences. This analogy and other observa-
tions tend to imply that Kauṭilya under-
stands the meaning of the terms as 'logical
reasonings' or as 'philosophy comprising of
logic and metaphysics'.
(5) Kauṭilya also refers to a view of the school
of Manu according to which Trayī, Vārtā
and Daṇḍanīti are the only three sciences
(Vidyās) and Ānvīkṣikī forms an aspect of
Trayī itself. trayīvis'eṣo hyānvīkṣikīti,
(6) In the context of ancient Indian politics
what is most important is that Ānvīkṣikī
formed a part of the training of princes
and Kings.</p>
<pb n="59" />
<p>(7) In AŚ I. 1. Kauṭilya gives a beautiful verse
in praise of Ānvīkṣikī as follows:
pradīpassarvavidyānām upāyassarva kar-
maņām
āśrayas sarvadharmāṇāṁ śaśvadānvīkṣikī
matā
(Ānvīkṣikī is a lamp for all other vidyās, a
means for doing all other deeds, and it is
always recognised as the protector of all
the Dharmas). It is very interesting that
this verse occurs also in the Vatsāyana
Bhāṣya on Nyāyasūtra I.1. (with a slight
variation that the last foot is read as vidyod-
deśe prakīrtitā) in praise of Ānvīkṣikī itself.
APANAYA--(1) A state of failure to achieve Yoga-
kṣema despite human efforts. It is the oppo-
site of Naya, which implies achievement of
Yoga-kṣema. (AŚ VI. 2). Cf. dṛṣṭakāritaṁ mānuṣaṁ, tasmin yoga-kṣemaniṣpattir-
nayah, vipattirapanayah (AŚ VI. 2).</p>
<p>(2) Improper use of the six Guṇas (Ṣadguṇa)</p>
<p>viz. Sandhi, etc. (AŚ VIII. 1 and IX.5). Cf. sandhyādīnāmayathoddeśāvasthāpanam apanayah (AŚ IX. 5).
(3) Injury or offence (as in Śiśupālavadha,
2. 14). Vide Apte, p. 31.
APASARPA--A secret agent or spy (AŚ XIII. 3)
cf. (Raghuvaṁśa, 17. 15), etc.
APASĀRA--(1) A (secret) outlet from forts. (AŚ
VII. 15). Cf. nicayāpasārasampannaṁ hi ṁaṇusyadurgamicchediti
kauṭilyah,</p>
<pb n="60" />
<p>(2) Retreating (AŚ, VII. 15). Cf. sandheyatāmātmanah parasya copalabhya sandadhīta,
viparyaye vikrameṇa siddhimapasāraṁ vā lipseta.
(3) The harem that proceeds with the King in
time of an expedition. (AŚ X. 2). kalatrasthānam apasārah.
(4) A balcony or verandah (AS' II. 5.) A warehouse should have verandas on both sides.
vivṛtastambhāpasāramubhayatah paṇyagrham.
(5) (In the matter of an investigation regarding
a stolen article) a comparatively earlier
seller (who is cited by the accused seller).
Cf. sa cedapasāramadhigacche dapasareda-
pasāra kṣayāditi kṣaye (AŚ III. 16).
APAVIDDHA--One abandoned by his own parents
(or by either of them) and then accepted and
brought up by another as his own son. (Manu-
Saṁ. IX. 171) cf. AŚ III. 7.
APAHĀRA--One of the eight avenues of the loss of
the exchequer. (Kośakṣaya). It is the common
name for three types of defalcation or misap-
propriation by officials engaged in the finance
department. The three varieties of Apahāra
are as follows-
(i) non-entry of an income in the official ledger,
(ii) non-payment of the sanctioned amount to
the actual payee, and
(iii) denial of the receipt of an income for the
royal exchequer. (AŚ II. 8). Cf. siddhamāyaṁ na praveśayati, nibaddhaṁ vyayaṁ na
prayaccati, prāptāṁ nīvīṁ vīpratijānīta ityapahārah (AŚ II. 8).</p>
<pb n="61" />
<p>AP-DURGA --(1) Abdurga-water fort. (vide Ma-
nu-Saṁ. VII. 7).
(2) =Audaka-Durga of AŚ II. 3.
APRĀPTAVYAVAHĀRA--A minor, who has not
attained majority of age enough for taking part
in a legal suit. (AŚ III. 1).
AMĀTYA-- (1) Administrative Officers, engaged in
various departments of the royal admi-
nistration.
(2) Only such persons who had been purified
by the four tests (Upaḍhās) were to be
appointed in the different departments
according to the various tests passed by
them. Those who had passed the Virtue
test (Dharmopadhā) were to be appointed
in the departments of judicial administra-
tion (i.e., Dharmasthīya and Kaṇṭakaśodha-
na); those who had passed the wealth test
(Arthopadhā) were to be appointed in the
King's revenue departments; and those who
had passed the Pleasure test (Kāmopadhā)
were to be appointed for guarding the.
royal ladies; those who passed the fear
test (Bhayopadhā) were to be appointed
for such official duties which could be per-
formed remaining physically nearer to the
King's person; and those who passed in all
the four tests could be appointed ministers
(Mantrīs). tatra dharmopadhā s'uddhān dharmasthīya kaṇṭakaśo-
dhaneṣu sthāpayet. arthopadhā s'uddhān samāhartṛsannidhātṛni-
cayakarmaṣu. kāmpopadhāśuddhān Vāhyābhyantaravihārarak-
ṣāsu. bhyayopadhāśuddhān āsannakāryeṣu rajṇah. sarvopadhā
śuddhān mantriṇah kuryuh. (AŚ I. 10).</p>
<pb n="62" />
<p>(3) The Amātyas as well as the Mantrīs, and
Sacivas of later times, were anticipated by
the Ratnins of the Vedic period. A. S. Altekar, SGAI, p. 163.
(4) Mahābhārata (XII. 85. 7-8) refers to a
council of 36 Amātyas. This council of
Amātya may be conjectured to have been
a body of advisers, larger than the council
of ministers (Mantripariṣad).
(5) According to Amarakosa, an Amātya, when
he is a Dhīsaciva, is called a Mantrī; others
are mere Karmasacivas. mantrī dhīsacivo'mātyo'nye karmasacivā statah. (Amarakosa,
Ksatriyavarga).
(6) Kauṭilya distinguished between a Mantrī
and an Amātya by pointing out that the
salary of the former was 48000 while that
of the latter was 12000. A person who was
otherwise qualified to be an Amātya was
not regarded as necessarily fit to become a
Mantrī. The Mantrī must have been an
Amātya, tested by all the 4 upadhās.
(7) Kauṭilya in AŚ, I. 9 enumerates a number
of qualities of an Amātya called Amātyasam-
pat. Many other types of officials were
required to share these qualities in common
with the Amātyas. Hence, the higher
officials like the Lekhaka, Vyavahārika,
etc., are taken to have been recruited from
the Amātya class.
(8) Junagarh Rock Inscription of Rudradāman
I (C. 150 A.D.) mentions one Suviśākha as</p>
<pb n="63" />
<p>an Amātya and enumerates a number of
qualities of Amātya (Amātya guṇas) in the
same line (i.e., line 19). pahalavena Kulaipaputreṇāmātyena suvisākhena yathā-
vadartha-dharma-Vyavahāra-darsanairānuragam abhivar-
dhayatā śaktena dāntenācapalena-vismitenā-ryeṇahāryeṇa.
(D.C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 180). In the portion
yathāvadartha-dharma, there may be a disguised suggestion
regarding the Arthopadhā and the Dharmopadhā in which
Suvisakha must have duly passed. The qualities and qualifications in Sanskrit original are
given as the adjectives of the word amātya as follows:
abhijātah (born of a high family),
svavagrahah (having restraint over senses),
kṛtasilpah (skilled in arts),
cackṣuṣmān (possessed of the eyes of the science of polity),
prājṇah (possessed of sharp intelligence),
dhārayiṣṇu (endowed with a sharp memory),
daksah (swift),
vāgmī (endowed with oratory),
pragalbhah (outspoken),
pratipattimān (endowed with the power of argument),
utsāhayuktah (enthusiastic),
prabhāvayuktah (endowed with Prabhavas'akti),
kleśasahah (capable of taking pain),
sucih (duly tested by the four Upadhās),
maitrah (friendly with all),
dṛḍhabhaktih (having firm loyalty to the King),
sīlayuktah (distinguished by good conduct),
balasaṁyuktah (endowed with physical strength),
ārogya saṁyuktah (endowed with a good health),
sattvasaṁyuktah (endowed with patience),
stambhavarjitah (free from vanity)
cā palavarjjitah (free from fickleness),
sampriyah (sober in look),
vairāṇām akartā (one who does not create enemies).
(9) Amātya is one of the seven constituents of
the state (Saptaprakṛtis).
AMATYA-SAMPAT--(1) The qualities and qualifi-
cations that are desired to be possessed by
an ideal Amātya. In AŚ I. 9 Kauṭilya enum-
erates these and they number 25 including</p>
<pb n="64" />
<p>qualities of Courage (pragalbhatā), firm
loyalty (dṛḍhabhakti), sharp intelligence
(prājñatā), etc.
(2) It is implied that one who possesses all the
qualities in full is the ideal Amātya or the
Amātya of the best type.
(3) One who possesses three-fourths of these
qualities is of the medicore type, and
(4) One who possesses half of these qualities is
an Amātya of the inferior type.
(5) These are also often referred to as Amātya-
guṇas.
AMITRA--See Ari.
AMITRABALA--The armed force of the enemy
Kingdom (AŚ II. 33. etc.).
AMITRASAMPAT--The weak points on the part
The presence of these weak
points or faults on the part of the enemy makes
him easily vulnerable. These are enumerated
in AŚ VI. 1.
ARĀJAKA--A state without a King.
(1) In Rāmāyaṇa this term is used to describe
the condition of a Kingdom in between the</p>
<pb n="65" />
<p>death of a King and his succession. Such
a situation arose immediately after the
death of Daśaratha. According to Rāmā-
yaṇa also Mātsyanyāya (q.v.) comes into
existence in such a state. Vide Rāmāyaṇa, Ayodhyā Kāṇḍa, ch. 67 (whole) and
Cf. nārājakāe janapade svakaṁ bhavati kasyacit
matsyā iva janā nityaṁ bhakṣayanti parasparaṁ (Ibid., Sl. 31).
(2) In Mahābhārata, this term is used to
describe the primordial condition of the
society, when there was no King at all.
In the initial stage, due to the absence
of a King there arose an extreme form of
lawlessness, technically called the Mātsya-
nyāya. Then the people came into a mutual
agreement (samaya), and finally at the
instance of lord Brahmā, they had Manu
as the first King. Cf. Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva, Ch. 59. Ślokas 13-22 and
arājakāh prajāh sarvvī pūrvaṁ vineśuriti naḥ śrutam
parasparaṁ bhakṣayanto matsyā iva jale kṛśān
sametya tāstataścakruh samayān iti naḥ śrutam
(Ibid., ch. 67, Slokas 17 ff.).
(3) In the Jaina Acārāṅgasūtra it is advised
that one should not live in an Arājaka
state. arāyāṇi vā gaṇarāyāṇi vā jubarāyāṇi vā dorajjāṇi vā veraj-
jāņi vā viruddha rajjāṇi vā, etc. (Ācārāṅgasūtra, II. 3. 1. 10). (Skt. arājakāni=Pkt. arāyāni).
Jayaswal takes this term of the Jain
work to mean, 'an idealistic constitution'
providing an 'extreme form of democracy'
'tried more than once in this country'. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, pp. 82-84.
For explaining as to how this form of</p>
<pb n="66" />
<p>government worked Jayaswal cites the
instance of the primordial Kingless
condition of the society as described in
the Mahābhārata, quoted above. But this
assumption of Jayaswal is based on the
solitary evidence of the Ācārāṅgasūtra. But
it appears to us that after the institution
of the Kingship there should not have
been the occasion for the recurrence of
the primordial type of Arājaka described
in the Mahābharāta, and there could have
been only casual conditions of anarchy
as described in the Rāmāyaṇa, and the
Kingdoms were very likely to face such
situations from time to time. In the
Jaina Ācārāṅgasūtra it appears to be most
likely to refer to only such a casual state
of anarchy as of the Kingdom of Ayodhyā
after the demise of Daśartha because of
being mentioned along with other regular
types of government. Such a condition
could have been happening in a certain
state, while, others advised to be avoided,
suffering from bad type of government like
Dvairājya and Vairājya, etc. (qq. v.)
ARI-- (1) An enemy King.
(2) =Amitra.
(3) =Śatru.
(4) There are three broad varieties of enemy
Kings, viz., Prakṛtyamitra, (the immediate
neighbouring Kings in the rear and in the
front of the Vijīgisu), bhūmyanantarah prakṛtyamitrah (AŚ. VI. 2). Sahaja-śatru (the</p>
<pb n="67" />
<p>enemy by birth) and Kṛtrima-amitra (the
enemy who indulges in opposition or in-
stigates others to oppose due to clash of
interest). tulyabhijanaḥ sahajaḥ (Ibid).
viruddho virodhayitā vā kṛtrimaḥ (Ibid).
ARI-PRAKṚTI--The King whose Kingdom sur-
rounds the Kingdom of the Vijīgiṣu (Ag-
gressor) or stands immediately contiguous
to the territory of the latter is called Ari-
prakṛti. (See Maṇḍala, where this King is
mentioned simply as Ari, enemy).
ARI-MITRA--One of the Kings forming the
Maṇḍala (see Maṇḍala). He is fourth from
the Vijīgiṣu (Aggressor) or the King belonging
to the centre of the Maṇḍala ; stands adjacent
to the Mitra, ally; but possesses friendship with
Ari, the enemy.
ARIMITRAMITRA--The last of the circle of allied
and enemy Kings. He is the ally of the ally
of the Ari, enemy. He belongs to the fringe of
the circle of allied and enemy Kings (see Maṇ-
ḍala) standing beyond the Mitramitra.
ARTHA-TRIVARGA-- Artha (wealth), Dharma
(Pity) and Kāma (Enjoyment) taken together
are called Artha-trivarga (AŚ X. VII). artho dharmaḥ kāma ityarthatrivargaḥ.
ARTHAŚĀSTRA--(1) Text on polity ascribed to
Kauṭilya.
(2) Science of politics. The usual meaning of
the word Artha is money. Hence, the term
Arthas'āstra seems to denote economics and</p>
<pb n="68" />
<p>not politics as such. Kauṭilya says that
Artha means avocations of men; the word
also means the land filled with men. Hence,
the term Arthaśāstra means the science,
which deals with the acquisition and protection or governance of the land inhabited by the people. manuṣyāṇaṁ vṛttirarthaḥ. manuṣyavatī bhūmi-rarthaḥ; tasyah pṛthivyā lābhapālanopāyah śāstram arthaśāstram iti. (AŚ XV. 1). The variant reading manuṣyavatī bhūmiritiyarthah (AŚ Basak, Vol. II. p. 159) is not suitable. Kauṭilya also applies the term Arthaśāstra to all the earlier treaties on politics. Cf. pṛthivyā lābhe pālane ca yāvantyarthaśāstrāṇi pūrvācāryaih
prasthāpitāni (AŚ the first sentence).</p>
<p>(3) According to Śukranītisāra (IV. 5. 56)</p>
<p>Arthaśāstra discusses instructions about
the government as well as the acquisition
of wealth.
(4) Kauṭilya uses the term Daṇḍanīti also in
the sense of Arthasastra. cf. ānvīkṣikītrayī
vārtā daṇḍanītiśceti vidyāḥ (AŚ I. 1) etc.
(5) In Daṇḍin's Daśakumāracrita, the science
of politics is called Daṇḍanītī cf. adhīṣva
tāvaddaṇḍanītim. iyamidānimācaryaviṣṇu-
guptena mauryārthe ṣaḍbhiḥ ṣlokasahasraiḥ
saṁkṣiptā. (BK. I.)
(6) In Mudrārāksasa of Visakhadatta the
term Arthaśāstra itself is used. Cf... iha
khalvarthasastrakārā strividhāṁ siddhimu-
paṛāvanayanti, (Act. III).
(7) In Amarakoṣa, Daṇḍanīti is given as a
synonym of Arthaśāstra. Cf. ānvikṣīkī daṇ-</p>
<pb n="69" />
<p>ḍanīti-starkavidyārthaśāstrayoḥ (Svarga-
varga). Earlier, Māhabhārata had the
term Rājadharma in the sense of the
science of polity. cf. sarvasya jīvalokasya
rājadharmaḥ parāyaṇam (Mhb. XII. 56-3).
(8) In later times, the term Nītiśāstra (being
an abridgement of the term Rājanītiśāstra)
came to be used in the sense of the science
of politics. cf. sarvopajīvakaṁ lokasthitikṛn-
nīti śāstrakam (Śukranītisāra, 1—5).
(9) Rājadharma, meaning the whole Duty
of the King, is mainly concerned with the
spiritual good of the individual King.
Arthaśāstra is mainly concerned with the
security and prosperity of the state as a
whole. U.N. Ghoshal, HIPI, p. 82.
(10) See also Dandanīti for a suggested distinc-
tion with Arthaśāstra.
ARDHASĪTIKA--A cultivator who pays half of
the produce to the owner of the land. (AŚ
II. 24 and III. 11).
AVAKRAYAṆA--Rent for a hired house. (AŚ
III. 8).
AVAKRETĀ--A landlord who lets out a house for
rent. (AŚ III. 8).
AVAMARDA--Occupation of the enemy's fort.
The procedure for this operation is described
in AŚ XIII. 4.
AVARODHA--(1) Siege or blockade of enemy's
fort.</p>
<pb n="70" />
<p>(2) Harem. Cf. śuddhāntaś cāvarodhaśca (Amarakośa, puravarga).
(3) Same as Avarodhana.
AVARODHANA--(1) Siege or blockade of enemy's
fort.
(2) Harem. Cf. stryāgāraṁ bhubhujām antahpuraṁ syādavarodhanam
(Amarakośa, puravarga).
(3) Same as Avarodha.
(4) Same as Prakrit Orodhana. Cf. Line 6 in Aśoka's Fifth Rock Edict: Mansehra version.
(Select Inscriptions, p. 23).
AŚVAMEDHA--The royal horse-sacrifice, which
used to be performed by Kings who desired to
attain supremacy over neighbouring Kings. A
specially consecrated horse used to be set free
for one year to roam over the neighbouring coun-
tries, the Kings whereof were forced to do hom-
age or fight. Cf. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 42.  The details of this sacrifice are given in Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa XIII. In ins-
criptional records, we find kings often boasting
of having performed one or two Aśvamedha
sacrifices.
AŚVAVYŪHA--A battle-order which consists of
cavalry soldiers (aśva). (AŚ X. 5).
AŚVĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of horses. This
officer was responsible for the training and well-
being of all the horses of the state. (AŚ II. 30).
ASURAVIJAYĪ--(1) One of the three kinds of
Conquerors, the other two being Dharmavijayī
and Lobhavijayī. (AŚ XII. 1).</p>
<pb n="71" />
<p>(2) This conqueror is satisfied not only by
grabbing the land and wealth of the defeated
King but also by taking the life of his sons
and wives. Cf. bhumi-dravya-putra-dārā prāṇaharaṇena asuravijayī
(AŚ XII. 1).
AHITA--A person who stands surety. (AŚ II. 1,
III. 13, etc.).
ĀKARĀDHYAKṢA--The Superintendent of Mines
(AŚ II. 12).
ĀKRANDA--(1) One of the Kings forming the cir-
cle of allies and enemies of the Maṇḍala theory.
(2) When the Aggressor (Vijīgiṣu) starts out on
a military expedition, one immediately adjacent
to him from behind, called Pārṣṇigrāha, creates
trouble for him, while the Ākranda, whose terri-
tory is separated by that of the Pārṣṇigrāha,
plays the role of an ally for the Aggressor (AŚ
VI. 2), and prevents the Pārṣṇigrāha from his
aggressive designs. Cf. Vijīgiṣorariṁ prati niryātasya yah pṛṣṭhavartī nṛpatih
deśākramaṇādyācarati sa pārṣṇigrāhah. tasya tathā kurvato
yo niyāmakah, tasyānantaro nṛpatih sa ākrandah (Kulluka's Com.
on Manu Samhitā, VII. 207).
ĀKRANDASARA--(1) One of the Kings forming
the circle of allies and enemies in the Maṇḍala
theory.
(2) The territory of this King stands fifth to
that of the Aggressor, (Vijīgiṣu), from behind.</p>
<pb n="72" />
<p>(3) He is separated from the Ākranda by the
Pārṣṇigrāhāsāra, and he works as an ally of the
Ākranda and hence as an ally of the Vijīgiṣu, the
central figure of the Maṇḍala (q.v.) (AŚ VI. 2)
ĀṬAVIKA-- (1) One of the 18 Tīrthas (q.v.) recog-
nised by Rāmāyaṇa and the Tilaka Com.
thereon (Rāṣṭrāntapāla).
(2) One of the 18 Mahāmātras or Tīrthas reco-
gnised by Kauṭilya. (AŚ I. 12). This officer is
in charge of the administration of the forest
areas, obviously lying at a considerable distance
from the capital.
(3) In AŚ V. 1. This officer is called Ațavī.
(4) He is sometimes referred to also as
Aṭavīpāla.
ĀTAVIKARĀJA--A Forester King. Apparently
different from the Āṭavika (also called Aṭavīpāla).
There were several small forest kingdoms in
central India (see under Āṭavīrājya). Samudra-
gupta takes pride in having subdued all the
Forester Kings. Cf. paricārakīkṛta sarvāṭavika
rājasya. (Allahabad Stone Pillar Inscription of
Samudragupta, Line 21).
ĀTMOPANIDHĀNA--(1) One of the five varieties
of Sāma (conciliation) (AŚ II. 10).
(2) It is an act of surrender with a statement
as follows --"I am not different from you. You
may use all my wealth for your purposes with
pleasure". (AS' II. 10). Cf. "yo'ham sa bhavān yan mama dravyaṁ tadbhavatā sva-
kṛtyeṣu prayojyatām". ityātmopanidhānam iti. (AŚ, II. 10).</p>
<pb n="73" />
<p>ĀTYAYIKA (-KĀRYA)--An emergent situation
requiring immediate action. The King is ad-
vised to call a meeting of the ministers (mantri-
ṇaḥ) and of the committee of executive officers
(mantripariṣad) for consultation as soon as such
a situation arises. cf. ātyayike kārye mantriṇo
mantripariṣadaṁ cāhūya brūyāt (AŚ I. 15). In
AS' I. 19 Kauṭilya observes-the King should
pay immediate attention to all the ātyayika
kāryas, and such situations should never be
allowed to pass unheeded. (sarvam ātyayikaṁ
kāryaṁ śṛṇuyānnātipātayet).
ĀDHĀTĀ--One who keeps the Ādhi with the cre-
ditor (AŚ, III. 12).
ĀDHI=(1) 'Pledge or mortgage of a chattel or im-
movable property to the creditor himself with or
without possession'. (HD. III. p. 419. f.n. 681).
(2) Vide AŚ III. 1, III. 12, etc. and Manu Saṁ
VIII. 143-145.
(3) Medhatithi under Manu Saṁ, VIII. 143.
divides Ādhi into 2 types, viz. Gopya. (which is
simply to be retained without any enjoyment)
and Bhogya (which may be enjoyed by the
creditor, while retained with him). Bhogya again
is divided into two types, viz. that which yields a
perennial enjoyment and that which yields a
periodical enjoyment.
(4) Cf. also Yājñavalkya, II. 58 where it is
maintained that the Ādhi is forfeited if it is not
released by such a time during which the profit
yielded by it amounts to two times of its original
value.</p>
<pb n="74" />
<p>(5) Medhatithi under ManuSaṁ, VIII. 149
explains Ādhi as a 'bandhakadravya' and men-
tions go (cow), bhū (land), hiraṇya (gold) as
examples.
ĀDHIPATYA--(1) A type of monarchy. The term
occurs in an oath of the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa</p>
<p>(VIII. 15)</p>
<p>(2) Sāyana explains the term as 'lordship over
the other Kings of heaven' after retirement from
the earth.
(3) A.B. Keith renders the term as 'overlord-
ship'. Basu, IAB, pp. 87 f..
ĀBHYANTARA KOPA--Antagonism towards the
King on the part of any one of the Mantrī, the
Purohita, the Senāpati and the Yuvarāja. (AŚ
IX. 3). mantripurohitasenā patiyuvarā jānāma nyatamakopo'bhyan-
tara kopah.
ĀYA--State Revenue or the income of the State.
(Yājñavalkya, I. 322, 326 etc. Manu Saṁ, VIII.
419). What is received by the King in the countryside as re-
venue (Bhāga) is also called Āya. Cf. grāmeṣu svāmigrāhyo bhāga
āyaḥ (Siddhāntakaumudī, quoted by Apte, p. 84).
ĀYATIPRADARŚANA--One of the five varieties
of Sāma (conciliation). It is based on a ref-
erence to the prospect of mutual benefit that
should result from the policy of friendship. cf.
asminnevaṁ kṛta idamavāyorbhavatītyāśājananam
āyatipradaraśanam (AŚ II. 10).</p>
<pb n="75" />
<p>ĀYAMUKHA--The chief sources of income of the
State. They are seven in number, viz. Mūla,
Bhāga, Vyājī, Parigha, Klṛpta, Rūpikā and
Atyaya (vide AŚ II. 6).
ĀYAŚARĪRA--(1) Sources of State Revenue, viz.
Durga, Rāṣṭra, Khani, Setu, Vana, Vraja,
Vanik-Patha and their sub-varieties. (vide AŚ
II. 6).
ĀYUKTA—(1) An officer in general. P. V. Kane. History of Dharmas'āstra, Vol. III. Appendix, Note 191.
(2) A Governor of a district or subdivision.</p>
<p>(Vide Kāmasūtra, V. 5.5.)</p>
<p>(3) The term may often be equated to Āyuk-
taka, Āyukta-puruṣa and also Yukta and
Yuktaka. Cf. Āyuktaka in D. C. Sircar. Indian Epigraphical
Glossary, p 42.
Cf. also Kāmandakīya Nītisāra, V. 81.
(4) As opposed to the term Anāyukta (AŚ II.
13) used in the same context, the term Āyukta
means 'an authorised official' while the former
means an unauthorised official or employee.
ĀYUKTAKA--See ĀYUKTA.
ĀYUKTA PURUṢA--See ĀYUKTA.
ĀYUDHĀGĀRA--An armoury or arsenal. (Vide
AS' II. 18 and Manu Saṁ IX. 280).
ĀYUDHĀGĀRĀDHYAKṢA--The superintendent
of the royal armoury. His duties are given in
detail in AŚ II. 18.
ĀVALĪYASA--Code of conduct for a comparatively</p>
<pb n="76" />
<p>weaker King. This is discussed in detail by
Kauṭilya in AŚ XII.
ĀSANA --(1) Maintaining a post against an enemy
standing firm so as to repel a charge, (opp. Yāna).
(2) It is one of the six modes of foreign-policy,
together called Ṣāḍguṇya (c.v.)
(3) It is also sometimes called Upekṣaṇa (AŚ
VII. 1, Kulluka on Manu Saṁ VII. 160),
Upekṣā (Mitākṣarā on Yājñavalkya, I. 347),
Sthāna (Manu Saṁ VII. 190) and Avasthāna
(Kulluka on Manu Saṁ VII. 190). Cf. upekṣaṇam āsanam (AŚ VII. 1).
(4) Kauṭilya observes that Sthāna, Āsana and
Upekṣaṇa are synonymous. Cf. sthānam āsanam upekṣaṇam cetyāsanaparyāyah (AŚ
VII. 4). But yet there are slight differences, when the Aggressor being
equal in strength with the Enemy waits for a
further increase in his strength it is called Āsana.
When the strength of the former is less than that
of the latter, it is called Sthāna, and when there
is indifference in respect of the application of the
expedients (Upāyas), it is called Upeksana. Cf. vis'eṣastu-guṇaikadeṣe sthānam, svavṛddhi-prāptyartham
ā sanamupāyānām aprayoga upekṣaṇam iti (AŚ VII. 4).
ĀSĀRA-- (1) Asara is an ally who belongs to the
rear of the Aggressor (Vijīgiṣu), while the ally
belonging to a territory which stands ahead of the
Aggressor is called Mitra. (AŚ. VII. 4 etc.). Cf. mitram ākrandaśca me śuravṛddhānu-raktaprakṛtih
(AŚ VII. 4).</p>
<pb n="77" />
<p>(2) This term is often appended to other terms
e.g. Ākrandāsāra. (see Maṇḍala).
(3) Movements of an army in an out-spread-
ing manner. (Amarakośa Kṣatriyavarga). Cf. syādāsārah prasāraṇam.
UCCHEDANIYA--One of the four broad varieties
of enemy, the other three varieities being, Yāta-
vya, Pīḍanīya and Karśanīya. This term implies
an enemy fit to be totally uprooted. It is advised
that an enemy who has no shelter (i.e., no
fort and no ally) or whose shelter (āśraya) is
weak is to be reckoned as an Ucchedanīya enemy.
Cf. anapāśrayo durbalāśrayo vā ucchedanīyaḥ
(AŚ VI. 2).
UTTAMA--SĀHASA--DANDA--(1) A fine, ran-
ging between five hundred and one thousand
Paṇas. (AŚ III. 18). pancaśatāvaraḥ sahasrapara uttamaḥ sāhasadaṇḍaḥ.
That the numerals here refer to the quantity of Paṇas may be
gathered from the definition of Purvasāhasa daṇḍa.
(2) Manu calls it Uttama-Sāhasa and fixes
the penalty at 1000 Paṇas. (Manu Saṁ. VIII.
138).
UTTHĀNA--A King's quality of remaining ever
active and energetic. The opposite is Anutthāna.
Kauṭilya is all praise for Utthāna, and he de-
nounces Anutthāna in very strong terms. The
former is the source of all wealth and prosperity</p>
<pb n="78" />
<p>while the latter is the cause of loss of all that is
gained and all that is yet to accrue. cf.
arthasya mūlam utthānam anarthasya viparyayaḥ
anutthāne dhruvo nāśaḥ prāptasyā nāgatasya ca
prāpyate phalam utthānāllabhate cārthasam-
padam (AŚ I. 19).
UTSĀHA GUNAS--A King's qualities of prow-
ess or enterprise. Kauṭilya names them as
follows:
Śaurya (fearlessness), Amarṣa (intolerance for
the evil), Śīghrata (promptness in action), Dākṣya
(dexterity in all affairs). (AŚ VI. 1).
UTSAHASAKTI--A King's power arising out of
martial spirit and physical prowess. See Śakti.
UDAYA--A profit. (AŚ III. 12).
UDĀSĪNA--(1) One of the Kings forming the circle
of allies and enemies of the Maṇḍala theory.
(See Maṇḍala).
(2) The territory of this King belongs either to
the right or to the left of the Aggressor (Vījigiṣu).
(3) He is an indifferent King and stands outside
the circle of the Aggressor, his enemies, and the
intermediate King. He is by far the mightier
King and is in a position to favour the Vijīgiṣu
(Aggressor), the Ari (enemy of the Aggressor) and
the Madhyama (the intermediate King) when
they are engaged in a conflict or even when they
remain in amity or to punish them when they
are engaged in a conflict.
Cf. ari-vijīgiṣu-madhyānāṁ bahiḥ prakṛtibhyo
balavattaraḥ saṁhatāsaṁhatanam ari-vijīgiṣu</p>
<pb n="79" />
<p>madhyamanamanugrahe samartho nigrahe
cāsaṁhatānāmudāsīnaḥ (AŚ VI. 2).
UDĀSTHITA--A spy in the guise of a mendicant.
(AŚ I. 11).
UDRANGA--(1) Bhāgakara in the sense of land-re-
venue. Cf. A. S. Altekar, SGAI, p. 270.
(2) In the Banskhera C. P Harṣa vardhana, (line
9) the donated land is said to be sodraṅga. Raj Bali Pandey, Historical and Literary Inscriptions, p. 146.
What is possibly meant is that the donee will
be entitled to receive land tax from the
subtenants from the donated land (just as the
King receives his Bhāga or Udraṅga).
UPAGATA--(1) One who offers himself to a man
other than his father as a son or is himself
offered by his relatives (other than parents) to
another man as son is called an Upagata son.
Cf. svayaṁ bandhubhirvā putrabhāvopagata upa-
gataḥ, AŚ III. 7.
(2) In Manu Saṁ IX. 177 this very type of
son seems to be called Svayaṁdatta.
UPAGHĀTA--(1) Secret murder through the appli-
cation of poison etc. (AŚ IV. 4)
(2) Harm done to others (Manu Saṁ II. 179).
(3) Loss of material (Yājñavalkya smṛti. II.
256).
UPADHĀ--(1) Test for ascertaining loyalty and
integrity of royal officers. Generally four kinds
of such test are recognised, viz. Dharmopadhā</p>
<pb n="80" />
<p>(test of virtue), Kāmopadhā (test of desire),
Arthopadhā (test of greed for wealth), Bhayo-
padhā (test of courage on occasions of fear).
The detailed procedure of applying these tests is
given in AŚ I. 10.
(2) Kauṭilya suggests that only one who can
pass in all the Upadhās should be appointed a
Minister. (sarvopadhāśuddhān maṇtriṇaḥ Kur-
yāt) (AŚ I. 10).
(3) Mahābhārata gives the number of Upadhās
to be five while the Kālikāpurāna, a much later
work, illustrates only three Upadhās, viz.
Dharmopadhā, Arthopadhā and Kāmopadhā. nityaṁ pancopadhātītair mantrayet saha mantribhih (Mbh. XII. 83. 52). Nilakaṇtha, commenting on this, takes the
meaning of Upadhā as Chala (i.e., fraud or trick or deception)
and gives a very queer explanation. According to his inter-
pretation, there are three basic Upadhās, viz. Vaciki (oral),
Kāyikī (physical) and Mānasikī (mental). Through various
combinations we have five varieties, viz., (i) Vācikī, (ii) Kāyikī,
(iii) Mānasiki, (iv) Kāyikī cum Vācikī and (v) Kāyikī cum Vāciki
cum Mānasikī. Cf. Kālikāpurāṇa, 87. 776-96a.
UPAJĀPA--Causing of dissension in the camp of
enemy. (AŚ I. 13. VII. 5, etc.) Cf. (Śiśupālava-
dha II. 99 and Kirātārjunīya. II. 47.
UPANIDHI--(1) A sealed deposit, deposited
with a person in a sealed container without dis-
closing the contents. (cf. Manu Saṁ VIII. 145,
149 and Medhātithi thereon.
śāstrāntaravadantarhito nyāsah. yadapradarśitarupam sa-
cihavastrādinā pihitaṁ nikṣipyate. See S. C. Banerji, A Glossary of Smrti Literature, p. 21 for other references.</p>
<pb n="81" />
<p>(2) Kauṭilya uses the term in the sense of a
trust, for he speaks of enjoying the Upanidhi.
(AŚ III. 12). Cf. upanidhibhoktā deśakālānurupaṁ bhogavetanaṁ dadyāt
(AŚ III. 12).
UPANIPĀTA--Calamity or damage caused to any
merchandise by the state (rājā), thief, fire and
water. Cf. raja-corāgnyudakabādhā upanipāta
(AŚ III. 15).
UPANISAT-PRAYOGA--Secret use of fire, poison,
etc. for the killing of enemy. The details are
described in AŚ Book XIV.
UPĀYUKTA--(1) A responsible and fully autho-
rised official (AŚ II. 9).
(2) This officer is immediately higher in rank
than the Yukta, for whenever there is any doubt
regarding the conduct of a Yukta, the King should
make an enquiry from the Upāyukta.(AŚ II. 8).
UPASTHANA--(1) A waiting hall for the subjects
coming to meet the King. (AŚ I. 19, X. 1).
(2) Āsthānamaṇḍapa in the same sense as in 1.
(3) A type of training for the elephants. (AŚ
II. 32).
(4) One of the ten assigned functions of a Koṣṭh-
āgārādhyakṣa (q.v.), is called Upasthāna, which
is, again, found in six forms mainly concerned
with measurement of materials. The details are
given in AŚ II. 15.
UPASTHAYIKA--Men engaged for looking after
the elephants and other such animals. Their</p>
<pb n="82" />
<p>pay is fixed at 60 paṇas yearly by Kauṭilya. (AŚ
V. 3).
UPAYA--(1) A means of success against an enemy
(Apte).
(2) There are four such Upāyas, viz. Sāma
(conciliation or negotiation), Dāna (bribery or
gift), Bheda (sowing of dissensions) and Daṇḍa
(punishment or military action).
(3) Kauṭilya also gives the term Upapradāna
for Dāna. Cf. Upāyassāmo-papradānabhedadaṇ-
ḍaḥ (AŚ II. 10).
(4) Manu seems to give the word Yuddha also
for Danḍa, for he advocates that it is better to
try to win the enemy with any one of Sāma,
Dāna and Bheda or with all of them put together,
but never with Yuddha. Thus, he uses the word
Yuddha, where he should have given the term
Daṇḍa. Cf. sāmnā dānena bhedena samastair
athavā pṛthak vijetuṁ prayatetārin na yuddhena
kadācana (Manu Saṁhitā. VII. 198).
(5) But, earlier Manu had already observed by
expressly mentioning the term Daṇḍa, that
of the four Upāyas, Sāma and Daṇḍa are the
best. Cf. sāmādīnāmupāyānaṁ caturṇāṁ api paṇ-
ḍitāḥ sāmadaṇḍau praśaṁsanti nityaṁ rāṣtrābhi-
vṛddhyaye (Manu Saṁ. VII. 109).
(6) From the immediately earlier verse we learn
that the enemy is to be brought under control
even by Daṇḍa if the earlier three Upāyas do
not work well (Manu Saṁ. VII. 108). From
Kulluka's com. we learn that Daṇḍa is praised</p>
<pb n="83" />
<p>because of its being the most effective expedient
though it involves loss of soldiers etc.
Cf. sāmni prayāsa-dhana-vyaya-sainya-kṣayādi-
doṣābhāvāt, daṇḍe tu tatsad-bhāvepi kāryasiddhya-
tiśayāt (Kulluka's com. on Manu Saṁ. VII. 109).
By this explanation of Kulluka it becomes con-
firmed that in VII. 198, Manu uses the term
Yuddha in the sense of Daṇḍa. We are also
led to believe that in the confirmed opinion of
Manu it is better to avoid Yuddha or Daṇḍa,
though it deserves to be praised as the most
effective expedient.
Yājñavalkya (I. 346) also instructs that Daṇḍa
should be taken resort to only as the last measure.
Kāmandaka adds to the traditional list of four
Upāyas, three more, and they are viz. Māyā
(deceit), Upekṣā (indifference) and Indrajāla
(creation of illusions). (See Kāmandakīya Nīti-
sāra, Canto XVIII for details).
UPEKṢAṆA-ASANA (q.v.) or STHĀNA (q.v.)
See Ṣadguṇa.
UBHAYAVETANA--A type of spy, who receives
pay from his actual master as well as from the
latter's enemy, with a feigned allegiance for
causing confidence in the mind of the enemy, for
the convenience of spying in the best interest
of the actual master. (AŚ VII. 14. etc.).
UBHAYAYĀTTĀ-SIDDHI—Joint administration.
An administration conducted jointly by the King
and the Minister, working in full consonance.
This term is used in Mudrāràkṣasa. III. See
Siddhi.</p>
<pb n="84" />
<p>URASYA--The middle portion of an army. The
other parts are the two paksas (the two wings or
frontal sides) and the two Kakṣas (the two
flanks or the two hinder parts)
Cf. pañcadhanuranīkasandhiḥ pakṣakakṣorasyā-
nām
(The five parts of the army, viz. the two Paksas,
the two Kaksas and the Urasya should usually
have a gap of 5 dhanus or 25 hands or 12 1/2 yards
between one another). AŚ X. 5 cf. also pakṣa-kakṣcrasyānām ekībhāve maṇḍalah
(AŚ X. 6).
EKRĀT--The sole unrivalled ruler. See Sārva-
bhauma.
AUDAKA-DURGA--(1) Water Fort (vide AŚ II.
3).
(2) Ap-Durga (Abdurga) of Manu. (vide MS.
VII. 70).
AURASA-PUTRA--(1) A son begotten by a man on
his duly married wife.
Cf. svayaṁ jātaḥ kṛtakriyāyām aurasaḥ (AŚ II. 7).
Cf. Manu Saṁ. IX. 166 for a definition.
(2) Also called Svayaṁjāta by Kauṭilya (AŚ III.
7).</p>
<pb n="85" />
<p>KAKṢA-- (1) Usually mentioned in duel number as
KAKṢAU.
(2) The two hinder parts of an army which is
recommended to be arranged in five parts as
follows, the two front parts called the 2 Pakṣas,
the two hinder parts called the Kakṣas and the
middle part called the Urasya (q.v.) (see AŚ X.
5. X. 6 etc.)
KAṆTAKA--(1) An antisocial element.
(2) Any source of vexation to the State and the
society like a thief. (AŚ VI. 1, Manu Saṁ. IX
252, 253, 260).
(3) Medhātithi on Manu Saṁ IX. 252 observes--
kaṇṭakaśabdaḥ pīḍāhetusāmānyāt taskarādīṣu
(Anti-social elements like the thief are called
Kaṇṭaka because of causing pain or vexation like
the thorn).
KAṆṬAKAŚODHANA--Legal procedure for
punishing the anti-social elements. Three judi-
cial magistrates called Pradeṣṭā, well equipped
with the Amātyaguṇas and also belonging to the
status of a Mahāmātra, form a court of trial for
dealing with cases of misappropriation, bribery
and other such corruptions. (AŚ IV. 1, etc.). Cf. Manu Saṁ., IX. 253.
KARA-- (1) Any sort of revenue or tax or duty pay-
able to the state. Land tax, customs duties,
annual revenue and all sorts of levies are meant
by the term when Manu discusses about the whole
system of Kara in Manu Saṁ, VII. 127 to 137.</p>
<pb n="86" />
<p>(2) Amara gives Bali and Bhāgadheya as
synonyms of Kara. bhāgadheyah karo bali (Amara, Kṣatriya Varga).
(3) Kauṭilya mentions it as one of the ten
varieties of Rāṣṭra in AŚ II. 15, where it occurs
side by side with Piṇḍakara (tax in kind received
from the countryside in a regular manner), Ṣad-
bhāga (one sixth of the land produce) and Bali
(additional levies). Here Kara seems to mean the
tributes received from feudatory Kings.
(4) Kauṭilya also keeps in mind the broader mea-
ning of Kara as a tax in general when he uses
the term to form the larger term Piṇḍakara.
(5) 'A tax in general' in the Smṛti literature. Cf. akarah śrotriyah, (Āpastamba Dharmasutra, II. 10.26.1),
brāhamaṇebhyah karādānaṁ na kuryāt (Viṣṇu Dharma Sutra
III. 25).
(6) A nice example of the term being used in the
sense of 'a tax in general' is found in the Allaha-
bad Stone Pillar Inscription of Samudragupta,
where it is used with the word sarva (all) to
mean 'all sorts of taxes and tributes'. sarvva-kara-dānājñakaraṇa (line 22) in ASPI of Samudra-
gupta. vide D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 165.
KARMAKARA--(1) A servant. He used to get a
mutually agreed salary. (AŚ III. 13). Cf. karmakarasya karmasambandham āsannā vidyuḥ yatha-
sambhāṣitaṁ vetanaṁ labheta. (The neighbours should have
the knowledge of the appointment of a new servant in any of the
families of the neighbourhood. The servant should receive an
agreed salary.)
(2) It seems that the status of a Bhṛtaka,</p>
<pb n="87" />
<p>(q. v.) who also used to get a regular salary, was
higher than that of the karmakara.
(3) The status of the karmakara seems to have
been higher than that of the Dāsa (q.v.)
KARMA-SACIVA--A minister responsible for ac-
tion or execution (opposite to Dhī-saciva, who
is a minister for counsel). See Saciva.
KARMA-SANDHI--Treaty involving an agreement
by both the parties to work for the construction
of fort and other such works.
Cf. 'tvaṁ cāhaṁ ca durgaṁ kārayāvahe' iti karma-
sandhiḥ (AŚ VII. 12).
KARŚANĪYA--One of the four broad varieties of
enemy, the other varieties being Yātavya, Ucch-
edanīya, and Pīḍanīya. When conditions are
just the reverse of under which an enemy is
reckoned as Ucchedanīya, the enemy is to be
treated as either Pīḍanīya or karśanīya. The
present term implies that the enemy is fit to be
troubled by way of putting him to loss of wealth.
cf. viparyaye pīḍanīyaḥ karśanīyo vā (AŚ VI. 2).
KĀNĪNA--The son born to a woman before her
marriage, is called a Kānīna-putra of the man
who marries her. Manu Saṁ. IX. 172.
Cf. 'Kanyāgarbhaḥ kānīnaḥ' AŚ III. 7.
KĀPATIKA--A spy in the guise of a student. (AŚ
I. 10, I. 11).
KĀMAJA--VYASANA(s)--Vices arising out of
passion. See Vyasana.
KĀRMĀNTIKA--One of the 18 Mahāmātras
Tīrthas, who is the supervisor of the state-won
mines and workshops. (AŚ I. 12, II. 4).</p>
<pb n="88" />
<p>KĀRVAṬIKA--(1) Khārvvaṭika, a territorial divi-
sion of the state consisting of 200 villages. (Al-
tekar, SGAI. p. 323).
(2) From what is given by Kauṭilya, it seems to
be a small town serving as the administrative
headquarters for 200 villages cf. dviśatagrāmyā
khārvaṭikam. . . . .sthāpayet (AŚ II. 1).
KUMĀRĀMĀTĀ--A queen other than the chief
queen, being the mother of a prince other than
the crown prince. Her allowance is fixed at
12000 paṇas yearly. (AŚ V. 3).
KUMĀRĀMĀTYA--Senior administrative officers
of the Gupta period. It seems to have been
more a title of honour. One example of Kumārā-
mātya is the celebrated name of Hariṣeṇa, the
foreign minister of Samudragupta and the author
of the text of the Allahabad Stone Pillar Inscrip-
tion of Samudragupta, who is also described as
Kumārāmātya. D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 262. This officer is called so, possibly
because of attaining the status of an Amātya
since his youth or because of enjoying the same
status as that of an heir apparent or Kumāra. See Altekar, SGAI, p. 345.
KŪṬAMUDRĀ—A counterfeit seal. (AŚ II. 34).
KŪṬAYUDDHA--Treacherous fight. In this type
of fight the aggressor uses fire, sword and
poison against the enemy through his secret
agents. The details of this treacherous warfare
are given in AŚ XII. 4-5. Kauṭilya precisely
defines it in AŚ, VII. 6 verse 8 as follows:</p>
<pb n="89" />
<p>vibhīṣaṇam avaskandaḥ pramādavyasanārdanam
ekatra tyāgaghātauca kūṭayuddhasya mātṛkā
(excessive intimidation, attack, tormentation
in time of confusion and distress of the enemy,
stopping of fighting in one hand and attacking
on the other hand-these are the characteristics
of a Kūṭayuddha).
KŪṬARŪPA--Counterfeit coins. (AŚ IV. 1).
KŪṬAŚĀSANA--A false or forged document.
KŪṬASĀKṢĪ--A false witness.
KŪPYA--(1) Certain valuable timbers, cane, bam-
boo, hemp, and certain other forest products,
certain poisonous materials, skin and other
such parts of certain animals, and certain base
metals like copper and bell metal are together
known by this term. (AŚ II. 17).
(2) In Manu Saṁ VI. 96 and X. 113, the term
seems to be used in the sense of all the base me-
tals.
KŪPYĀDHYAKṢA--The chief officer entrusted
with the responsibility of collecting the materials
collectively known as Kūpya for the royal store.
(vide AŚ II. 17).
KṚTAKA-PUTRA--(1) One who is simply ac-
cepted by a person other than his parents is a
Kṛtaka-putra to the new father. Cf. putratyé dhikṛtaḥ kṛtakaḥ (AŚ III. 7).
(2) The Kṛtaka type of son (putra) is neither
offered by his parents nor offers himself to the
new father.</p>
<pb n="90" />
<p>(3) This type of son is called Krtrima by Manu.
(see Manu Saṁ. IX. 169).
KṚTA (KṢETRA)--Duly cultivable land. (AŚ
II. 1).
KṚTYA--Disgruntled subjects who are likely to
be won over by the propaganda of the enemy.
(AŚ I. 13, I. 14).
KṚTRIMA-PUTRA--Same as Kṛtaka-putra.
KṚTRIMA-MITRA--See Mitra.
KṚTRIMA-ŚATRU--The enemy who indulges in
acts of hostility or instigates others to be hostile,
due to clash of interest. This enemy is called
artificial (Kṛtrima) presumably because, this
enemy is bound to be friendly again as soon as
there ceases to be any clash of interest. Vide S. Mookerjee, 'Political wisdom of ancient India',
Journal of the Bihar Research Society. XXXXV, parts I-IV.
December, 1959, See
Ari.
KOPA--(1) Disaffection or antagonism towards the
King. This term is often used in conjunction
with other appropriate words. See Bāhyakopa
and Abhyantara-Kopa. (AŚ VIII. 2, IX. 3. etc.),
which are its two main varieties.
(2) Anger, recognised as a source of the vices
(Vyasanas) named Vākpāruṣya, Daṇḍapāruṣya
and Arthadūṣaṇa. (AŚ VIII. 3).
KOŚA/KOṢA--(1) One of the seven constituents
of the state (Saptaprakṛti).
(2) Revenue.</p>
<pb n="91" />
<p>(3) The royal exchequer. for (1), (2) and (3) see-AŚ VI. 1 and VIII. 1.
(4) Accumulation of wealth (Amara, Śānta-
varga). Koso'stri kutmale khaḍge pidhane' rthaughadivyayoh.
(5) Treasury or the apartment where money
and other valuables are kept (Manu Saṁ. VIII.
419).
6) The royal treasury in the sense of a reserve
fund. Cf. kośamulā hi rājānah kośo vṛdhikaro bhavet (Mbh. XII.
119. 16).
KOŚAGṚHA--The treasury house.
KOŚANIRHĀRA--Grains purchased with funds
received from the royal treasury. (AŚ II. 15).
KOŚĀSAṄGA --(1) Misappropriation or defalcation
of the royal revenue (AŚ VIII. 5).
(2) Evasion of taxes (Ibid).
KOŚASAMPAT--The qualities of an ideal royal
exchequer. (AŚ VI. 1).
KOŚĀDHYAKṢA--The head of the Treasury De-
partment. A. S. Altekar, SGAI p. 100,
KOŚĀBHISAMHARAṆA--Adaptation of ways
and means for augmenting a depleting treasury
(AŚ V. 2).
KOṢTHĀGĀRA--The royal granary (AŚ II. 5).
KOṢTHĀGĀRĀDHYAKṢA--The superintendent
of the royal granary (AŚ II. 15, where details
of his duties are given).</p>
<pb n="92" />
<p>KRĪTA-PUTRA-- (1) One who is purchased from
one's real parents to be treated as a son by the
purchaser. Cf. pari-kritaḥ krīta iti (AŚ III. 7).
(2) Also called Kritaka as in Manu Saṁ. IX. 174.
KRODHAJA VYASANA(S)—Vices arising out of
anger. See Vyasana.
KṢATTĀ-- (1) Nom. singular form of the word
Kṣattṛ.
(2) The Chamberlain. As such he is one of the
eleven Ratnins (q.v.) deserving special honour
from the King-elect in time of his consecra-
tion.
KṢETRAJAPUTRA—(1) The offspring of the wife
by a kinsman duly appointed to raise up the
issue on behalf of the actual husband, who is
physically incapable of begetting the child him-
self. (Manu Saṁ. IX. 167) cf. also Yājñavalkya
I, 68-69 etc.
(2) Kauṭilya suggests that the kinsmen appointed
may belong to the same gotra as of the actual
husband or to another gotra (AŚ III. 7).
KHANAKA-YODHĪ--A soldier who fights from a
pit. Cf. khanakā hi khātena śastreṇa cobhayathā
yudhyante (AŚ VII. 10).
KHĀRVAṬIKA-KĀRVATIKA--A small town be-
longing to a block of two hundred villages
(AŚ II. 1). dviś atagrāmyā khāṛvaṭikam (AŚ II. 1).</p>
<pb n="93" />
<p>GAṆA--(1) A republican government. Same as
Gaṇa-rājya, denoting a government by an assem-
bly or parliament. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 21 ff. cf. Mahābhārata, Śānti-
Parva. ch. 107, verses 6-32, gaṇānām vṛttimicchāmi śrotuṁ mati-
matāṁ vara, etc.
(2) A form of government, where the power was
vested not in one person, but in a gaṇa or group
of people. Saṁgha was another term used
precisely in the same sense. Altekar, SGAI, p. 109 ff.
(3) A tribal republic. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 41.
(4) That the term implies a republican type of
government, sharply different from the monarch-
ical type is clear from an oft quoted passage of
the Avadāna-Śataka, the meaning whereof is the
"Your Majesty, some countries are under gaṇas
and some are under Kings.'' "..deva keciddeśā gaṇādhīnāh kecid rājādhīnā iti (Avadāna
Śataka, ed. Speyer, Petrograd, 1902, II. P. 103, quoted by
Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 26). An example of the ancient
republican states is that of the Vṛṣhṇis, which used to issue coins
not in the name of any single monarch but in the name of the
whole gaṇa (tribe). Cf. the celebrated coin-legend, vṛṣṇi-rājan-
ya-gaṇasya-trātasya (Jayaswal, Ibid., p. 151).
In the Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva (81.29) also Andhaka-
Vṛṣṇis are mentioned along with Yādavas, Kukuras, and Bhojas.
Nārada says that all of these republics are attached to Kṛṣhṇa,
presumably implying that all these republics formed a sort of
federation for some time.
(5) A unit of army comprising 3 Gulmas or in</p>
<pb n="94" />
<p>other words 27 chariots, 27 elephants, 81 horses,
and 135 footmen. P. C. Chakravarti AWAI. p. 83.
GAṆA TITHA--A member whose attendance com-
pleted the quorum in a Gaṇa or republican
assembly. (Vide Altekar, SGAI. p. 131).
GAṆA-PURAKA--(1) A 'whip' or an officer
whose duty was to see whether the lawful
quorum of a gaṇa assembly was formed before
it transacted official business. Altekar, SGAI, p. 131. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 23.
GAṆA-PRADHANA--(1) The President of the Gov-
erning body of a Gaṇa republic. Vide Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 103. cf. Mahā-
bhārata, Śānti Parva, ch. 107. V. 24 and see
under Saṁgha-mukhya.
(2) Sri Krishna was such a President of the An-
dhaka-Vṛishni republic. The position and pri-
vileges of such a President may be presumed from
Sri Krishna's complaint to Nārada that
"in the guise of a master he is the slave of the
relatives forming the political community. He
can have only a partial enjoyment of the plea-
sures of life and he has to listen patiently to
all the bitter words of criticism of the members
of the general republican assembly". Vide Altekar, SGAI, p. 127 and
Cf. dāśyam aiśvaryabhāvena jñātināṁ vai karomyaham ardha-
bhoktā smi bhogānāṁ vāgduruktāni ca Kṣame (Māhābhārata
Śāntiparva, ch. 81. 5).
GAṆA MUKHYA--Same as Saṁgha mukhya (q.v.)</p>
<pb n="95" />
<p>GAṆA-RĀJYA--(1) A republic; same as Gaṇa,
where the political power is vested not in one
person, but in a gaṇa or group of people.
(2) The term occurs in a celebrated passage of a
Jaina work, Ācārāṅgasūtra, as follows: One
"should avoid visiting such countries which have
no King, i.e. no head of the government, or are
governed by gaṇa form of government, or have
a crown prince as the ruler, or have two kings,
or are governed by a foreign ruler, or are governed
by two contending Kings." "… . . .arāyāṇi vā gaṇarāyāṇi vā juarāyāṇi vā dorajjāņi vā
verajjāṇi vā viruddha-rajjāṇi vā" where Pkt. gaṇarāyaṇi= Skt.
gaṇarājyāṇi (=gaṇa-states) (Āvāraṁgasuttam, ed. Jacobi, II.
3.1.10., quoted by Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 84).
(3) On the strength of terms like Gaṇatitha,
Gaṇapūraka, and Gaṇamukhya, it may be pre-
sumed that in Gaṇarajya, the political power is
vested in a parliament headed by an elected
president.
GAṆIKĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of courte-
sans. He was responsible for controlling the
entire institution of prostitution in the state
(AŚ II. 27).
GĀṆANIKA—An account officer. cf. AŚ II. 7.
GŪḌHAJAPUTRA--(1) A son born to a woman
by a man other than her actual husband through
a secret union. (Manu Saṁ, IX. 170).
(2) Kauṭilya suggests that the Gūḍhaja is born
in the residence of some relative of the wife clan-
destinely. (AŚ. III. 7).</p>
<pb n="96" />
<p>GŪḌHAPURUṢA—(1) Spy.
(2) Secret emissary.
(3) Disguised agent. The probable varieties of
such spies and their activities are described in
AŚ I. 11.
GUṆASAṀKĪRTANA—(1) Flattery.
(2) It is one of the five varieties of Sāma (q.v.).
It is in the form of the praise of family, physique,
action, habit, learning and materials belonging
to the party, who is to be won by this type of the
policy of conciliation. Cf. abhijana-śarīra-karma-
prakṛti-śruti-dravyādīnāṁ guṇāguṇagrahaṇaṁ
prasaṁsā-stutirguṇasaṁkīrtanam. (AŚ II. 10).
GULMA-- (1) A host of armed guards. Kulluka or Manu Saṁ, VII. 114.
(2) A unit of army consisting of three senamu-
khas or 9 chariots, 9 elephants, 27 horses and 45
footmen. P. C. Chakravarti, The Art of War in Ancient India, p. 83.
GODHYAKṢA--Superintendent of cows. This offi-
cer was required to look after the protection and
well-being of all the domestic animals of the state
like cows, buffaloes and goats. He was also to
keep a register of the entire population of such
animals of the state. (AŚ II. 29).
GOPA--(1) A subordinate officer either under a
Samāhartā or under a Nāgarika.
(2) The Gopa under a Samāhartā works in the
countryside (Janapada) and remains in charge
of a minimum of five larger villages or a maximum</p>
<pb n="97" />
<p>of ten smaller villages. He keeps record of the
lands under cultivation, crops grown and other
such details of the whole area under his jurisdic-
tion (AŚ III. 35).
(3) The Gopa under the Nāgarika works in the
city. He is in charge of a maximum of forty
smaller families and a minimum of ten larger
families. He keeps record of sex, caste, profes-
sion and other details of the members of the
families allotted to him. (AŚ II. 36).
GOVIKARTA--(1)=Govikartana.
(2) One of the eleven Ratnis (q.v.).
(3) The term means either 'the officer in charge
of the royal herd of cattle,' or 'the master of
forests cum the officer in charge of the
huntsmen'. Altekar, SGAI, p. 162.  Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 196.
GRĀMA--(1) In Ṛgveda, the term relates to a group
of related families or a sect and only at a later
time it came to mean a regular village or settle-
ment. Basham, The Wonder that was India, P. 35.
(2) At all times the village was the unit of gov-
ernment. There was no uniformity of the
size of a village. A grāma could contain even
as many as 1,000 families in the upper limit. Basham, Ibid, p. 104.
GRĀMAṆĪ--(1) The village headman or a military
captain. It is one of the few government offi-
cers mentioned in the Ṛgveda. (Vide Altekar,
SGAI, p. 311).</p>
<pb n="98" />
<p>(2) He is one of the eleven Ratnis, in the capacity
of the head of the Township or the village corpo-
ration, as mentioned in Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa
and Taittirīya Brāhmaṇa. (Vide Jayaswal,
Hindu Polity, p. 195). In Maitrāyaṇī Saṁhitā
and Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa etc. i.e., the Maitrāyaṇi edn of the Yajur Veda. Cf. vāiśyo vai grmaṇiḥ. the Gramaṇī is mentioned to be of the Vaiśya caste.
(3) Altekar rightly observes that to be honoured
as one of the Ratnīs, the Grāmaṇī mentioned in
the list of Ratnīs (as given in the Śatapatha Brāh-
maṇa and other such sources) must have been
"the most prominent among the village headmen
of the kingdom, who might have been selected
to serve on the council of the ratnīs". Altekar, SGAI, p. 162.
(4) According to Basham, in the Ṛgvedic age
the Grāmaṇī was the chief of the sect, because
the term Grāma in the Ṛgveda usually refers
to a group of kinsfolk and only in the later litera-
ture it means a regular village or a regular settle-
ment. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 34 f.
GRĀMABHṚTAKA--(1) Probably the village
headman and same as Grāmabhartṛ or Grāma-
pati. P. V. Kane, History of Dharmaśāstra, Vol. III (Index). Yājnavalkya, II. 271.
(2) In AŚ III. 11 the witness given by a Grā-
mabhṛtaka is said to be invalid. Hence, it may
be presumed that the term more probably means</p>
<pb n="99" />
<p>one who depends on alms received from the whole
village. Cf. AS. Trans. p. 199.
(3) It may also mean a workman engaged by the
entire village on payment of a certain emolu-
ment. See Bhṛtaka.
GRĀMA MAHATTARA(S)--Village elders who
functioned with certain executive and adminis-
trative powers in the Pallava and Vakataka
kingdoms. (c. 250-550 A.D.). Altekar, SGAI., p. 230
GRĀMA MAHĀJANA(S)--Great men of the vil-
lage, who, in the Karnataka region, used to
manage schools, construct tanks, build rest
houses and such other civil works, as evidenced
by inscriptional records. Altekar, SGAI, p 235
GRĀMIKA--A village headman. (AŚ. III. 10,
Manu Saṁ, VII. 116, 118).
CAKRAVARTĪ--(1) Pali Cakkavatti.
(2) The world ruler or the Universal Emperor.
(3) According to the Buddhist tradition, the
World Ruler possesses 'seven jewels' viz. the
wheel treasure, the elephant treasure, the horse
treasure, the treasure of a woman, the treasurer
and the adviser. He also possesses five good
qualities by way of knowing wealth, virtue, mea-
sure, time and the assembled men. His con-</p>
<pb n="100" />
<p>quest of the quarters is achieved not by force
but by righteousness. Cf Dharmavijaya. His domination over
the vassals assumes the form of the enforcement
of the five moral precepts binding upon the
Buddhist layman. See Ghoshal, A History of Indian Political Ideas, pp. 77-79
and pp. 267 f; Basham, The Wonder that was India, pp. 83f.
(4) According to Kauṭilya, however, the Cakra-
vartī is just an emperor having political supre-
macy over whole of the Cakravartikṣetra, which
is defined as the territory extending north to
south from the Himalayas to the Southern sea
and stretching from east to west for a distance of
1,000 Yojanas. Kauṭilya's concept of a Cakravartī is derived from the
definition of this very term. deśah pṛthiví, tasyāṁ himavat samudrāntaram udīcīnaṁ
yojanasahasraparimāṇaṁ tiryak cakravartikṣetram. (AŚ IX. I).
CAKRAVARTĪ-KṢETRA—See Cakravartī.
CATURAṄGA-BALA-- (1) The 'four-fold' army,
consisting of foot-soldiers (patti), car-warriors
(rathīs), cavalry (aśvārohīs) and elephant riders
(gajarohis). The term is used to refer to all the four varieties of army
together. cf. deśam alpavarṣa-paṅkam maruprāyaṁ caturaṅgabalo
yāyāt.
(Expedition should be made with all the four wings of army
in a desert area which gets very little mud even after rains).
(AŚ IX. 1).
(2) Also called caturaṅga-senā or caturaṅga-camū.
(3) Chariots ceased to be used at all about the
seventh century A.D. Yet the term Caturaṅga-
bala continued to be used in inscriptions and</p>
<pb n="101" />
<p>literature till very late days. P.C. Chakravarti, The Art of War in Ancient India, p. 2. The term must have been adored by the court poets as a matter
of poetical convention (Kavisamaya).
(4) Besides the above classification there was
also the convention of a six-fold division based
on the sources of recruitment. Hence see Ṣaḍaṅ-
ga-bala.
(5) The term Patti (q.v.) has yet another meaning.
The infantry is also often called Padāti.
CĀTURANTA--A world ruler with his territory
extending up to the four oceans. (AŚ VI. 1
verse 3).
CITRA GHĀTA--Capital punishment accompanied
by physical torture (AŚ IV. 11).
JANA--A Vedic term, which means the whole people
or the whole tribe or the whole country, being an
aggregate of several viśas. The chief of a Jana,
being a king, is called the Janapati. Cf. viśvā-
mitrasya rakṣati brahmedaṁ bhārataṁ janam,
'the prayer of Viśvāmitra protects the whole
people of Bhārata', (Ṛgveda. III. 53.2).
JANAPATI--A Vedic term meaning a King, who is
the chief of a Jana or a group of several Viśas
(see Jana).
JANAPADA—(1)=RĀṢṬRA.
(2) =DEŚA. Cf. brahmāvartaṁ janapadam atha cchāyayā gāhamānaḥ
(Meghaduta I. 49).</p>
<pb n="102" />
<p>(3) The territory of a state.
(4) The country as against the city (i.e., Pura or
Nagara or Durga). K. P. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 230.
(5) In AŚ. II. 1, Kauṭilya discusses colonisation
of the countryside (Janapada).
(6) In AŚ. VI. 1, he discusses the marks of a
good rural area (Janapada sampat) and in AŚ.
VIII. 1, he discusses the calamities of the rural
area (Janapada Vyasana).
(7) According to K. P. Jayaswal the term had
been used in the more ancient sources in the sense
of a 'political community' (HP. p. 31) or a
'political nation' (HP. p. 43). But these mean-
ings are controversial.
(8) Village as opposed to the town (Pura). We have the term Janapadavadhū (Meghadūta, I. 16) in the sense of rural women.
(9) One of the seven constituent elements (sapt-
āṅga or saptāprakṛti) of the state.
(10) In the Brāhmaṇas this term denotes both
'people' as opposed to the king and the 'land'
or 'realm'. Vedic Index, Vol. I, p. 273.
JANAPADA DHARMA--(1) The term occurs in
Manu Saṁ. VIII. 41.
(2)=Deśadharma as it occurs in Manu Saṁ. I.
118.
(3) The term plainly means the 'customs of the
province concerned', which should be taken Altekar, SGAI, p. 149.</p>
<pb n="103" />
<p>into consideration by the court in time of judging
a dispute on inheritance, marriage, etc.
(4) Deśadharma (Janapada dharma) is referred to
as a source of law also by Gautama. deśajātikula-dharmā āmnāvairaviruddhāh pramāṇam (Gautama D. S. XI. 20).
(5) Jayaswal takes the term to mean laws formu-
lated by the Law making popular parliament,
called Janapada. Jayaswal, H.P., p. 232.
JANAPADA-SAMPAT--The good qualities and the
desirable features of an ideal territory (i.e. the
expanse of the land) of an ideal state. Kau-
ṭilya gives the details in AŚ. VI. 1.
JANMAN(S)—A term occurring in the Vedas, pre-
sumably means a village consisting of people
having the same lineage. (see also Macdonell
and Keith, Vedic Index. Vol. I).
JAYA-SKANDHĀVĀRA--The victorious camp.
Same as Skandhāvāra.
JĀNAPADA—(1) Citizen belonging to the country-
side as opposed to the people belonging to the
city. The term is often found used in the plural
as Jānapadāḥ. In that case it should mean the
citizens of the countryside, as a whole. See Pauras and n. 1 under the same.
(2) Jayaswal understands the term Jānapadāḥ, in
the sense of a 'Realm Assembly' (HP. p. 229 ff)
or a political institution of the type of a popular
assembly with executive and judicial authority.</p>
<pb n="104" />
<p>(3) This term means the 'subjects' in Śatapatha
Brāhmaṇa, XIV. 5.1.20. Vedic Index, Vol. I, p. 273.
TAKṢĀ-- (1) One of the Ratnins (q.v.) named in
the Maitrāyaṇī Saṁhitā (i.e. the Maitrāyaṇī
edn. of the Yajurveda).
(2) The plain meaning is 'carpenter'. In order
to be one of the Ratnins, the Takṣā must have
been the 'chief royal carpenter'.
(3) Takṣā is also the name of the architect of
the gods. (Apte, p. 227). Hence, it is more
likely that the Takṣā was the chief royal
carpenter cum state architect in chief.
TĀPASA VYAÑJANA—A spy or secret agent in
the guise of a mendicant (AŚ I. 16).
TĪKṢṆA--An extremely courageous secret agent
who would never care for his life. Kauṭilya
describes that for the gain of money the Tīkṣṇas
would fight even with an elephant or a snake.
Cf. ye janapade śūrāstyaktāmāno hastinaṁ vyālaṁ
vā dravyahetoḥ pratiyodhayeyuste tīkṣṇāḥ (AŚ
I. 12).
TĪRTHA-- (1) Minister.
(2) Head of an administrative department.
(3) There used to be 18 Tīrthas in any adminis-
trative set up.</p>
<pb n="105" />
<p>(4) According to Nītivākyāmṛta (ch. II) of Soma-
deva Suri, Tīrthas are the judicial and the exe-
cutive officers. dharmasamavāyinah kāryasamavāyinaśca puruṣāḥ tīrtham.
(5) Rāmāyaṇa (II. 100.36) mentions the term
Tīrtha and mentions the number of Tīrthas to
be eighteen. kaccidaṣṭādasānyeṣu svapakṣe daśa panca ca tribhistribhi-
ravijnātairvetsitīrthāni cāraṇaih
(6) The Tilaka com. on Rāmāyaṇa mentions the
following officers as Tīrthas : Mantrī, Purohita,
Yuvarāja, Senāpati, Dauvārika, Antaḥpurā-
dhikṛta, Bandhanāgārādhikṛta, Dhanādhyakṣa,
Rājājña-vakta, Prāḍvivāka ( = Vyavahārapraṣṭā)
Dharmāsanādhikṛta Vyavhāranirṇeā (=Sabhya),
Senābhṛtidānādhyakṣa, Karmante vetaṇagrāhiṇaḥ,
Nagaradhyakṣa, Rasṭrantapala (Ātavika), Daṇ-
ḍaṇādhikārī and Durgapāla.
(7) Kauṭilya uses the term Mahāmātra also for
Tīrtha, for he also gives a list of 18 Mahāmātras
and the same is identical with the list given
by the Tilaka com., and a little later in the
The 18 Mahāmātras are enumerated by Kauṭilya in AŚ. I.12, and they are viz. Mantrī, Purohita, Senāpati, Yuvarāja,
Dauvarika, Antarvamsika, Praśāṣṭā, Samāhartā, Sannidhātā,
Pradeṣṭā, Nāgarika, Pauravyavahārika, Kārmāntika, Mantri-
pariṣadadhyakṣa, Daṇḍapāla, Durgapāla, Antapāla and Āṭavika.
(According to a variant reading we should read Nāyaka for
Nāgarika). See under MAHĀMĀTRA.
Tilaka com. quotes a verse from some Lexicon, according
to which the word tīrtha, besides other meanings, also has the
meaning as the group of 18 beginning with mantrī : yonau jala-
vatāre ca mantryadyāṣṭādaśavapi puṇyakṣetre tathā pātre tirthaṁ
syād darśaneṣvapi.</p>
<pb n="106" />
<p>same chapter, in the second verse, Kauṭilya
refers to eighteen Tīrthas (Tīrtheṣvaṣṭādaśasvapi)
obviously with reference to the 18 Mahāmātras.
(8) Nīlakaṇṭha, commenting on Mahābhārata
Śānti Parva, 57. 17, quotes 4 verses from a work
called Nitiśāstra (?) containing almost an identical
list of 18 Tīrthas. (mantrī+ purohitaścaiva . . . .
tīrthānyaṣṭadaśaivatu).
TŪṢṆĪ-DANḌA—Same as Tūṣṇīṁ-yuddha.
TŪṢNĪN-YUDDHA--Same as Mantrayuddha (q.v.)
TRAYĪ-- (1) The 'three Vedas' taken collectively.
The three Vedas included in this term are Ṛk-,
Yajuḥ-, and Sama-vedas (cf. Manu Saṁ, IV.
125).</p>
<p>(2) It is one of the four basic sciences (Vidyās)</p>
<p>(AŚ I. 1).
(3) It forms a part of the King's curriculum of
studies. He is advised to learn the sacred canon
(Trayi) along with philosophy (Ānvīkṣikī) from
the cultured persons. trayīm ānvīkṣikīṁ ca siṣṭebhyah (AŚ I. 5).
DAṆḌA--(1) A measurement of length. It is equal
to 4 Aratnis, i.e., 96 fingers and its synonyms
are Dhanuḥ, Nālikā and Pauruṣa. (Vide AŚ
II. 20). caturaratnirdaṇḍo dhanur nālikā pauruṣaṁ ca.
(2) A punishment in general. Cf. Manu Saṁ. VIII. 126 etc.
Cf. tānavamanyāmānaṁ daivo' pi daṇḍaḥ spṛśati (AŚ I. 13)
etc.</p>
<pb n="107" />
<p>(3) The King's coercive authority. Cf. Manu Saṁ. VII. 14 etc. and see U.N. Ghoshal, HIPI,
p. 53, for other references.
(4) Attack, assault or violence. In this sense it
is the last of the four political expedients
(Upāyas). Cf. Manu Saṁ. VII. 109; Śiśupālavadha II 54, At VII. 198,
Manu seems to equate Daṅḍa to Yuddha. Kauṭilya speaks of three
varieties of Daṇḍa, viz. Vadha (killing), Parikleśa (Torturing
like putting in the prison and beating), Arthāharaṇa (grabbing of
wealth).
Cf. vadhaḥ parikleśortha-haraṇaṁ daṇḍa iti (AŚ II. 10).
(5) The military power. Cf. Manu Saṁ, "amātye daṇḍa āyatto" etc. (VII. 65).
Medhātithi says-amātye senāpatau daṇḍo hastyādibalam
āyattam. Medhātithi here ex-
plains Daṇḍa as the Bala comprising of ele-
phants etc.
(6) A form of military army or battle order
(Vyūha). AŚ, X. 6. Cf. P. C. Chakravarti, The Art of War in Ancient India, pp.
113, 115,
(7) Soldiers, as in the term Daṇḍa sampat.
(AŚ VI. 1).
DAṆḌANĪTĪ--(1) One of the four basic sciences
(Vidyas). Cf. ānvīkṣikī trayīvārtā daṇḍanītiśceti
vidyāḥ (AŚ I. 1)
(2) In contrast with the definitions of Trayī
and Vārtta, it is defined to be concerned with
policy and impolicy. Cf. nayāpanayau daṇḍa-
nītyām (AŚ I. 1).
(3) But the acquisition and preservation of all
other Three Vidyās depend on the King's coer-</p>
<pb n="108" />
<p>cive authority (Daṇḍa). In other words, Daṇ-
ḍanīti consists of the principles (nīti) of the said
coercive authority (Daṇḍa). Cf. tasya nītir
daṇḍanītiḥ (AŚ I. 4.)
(4) According to Amara, it is same as Arthaśā
stra (q.v.).
(5) Thus Daṇḍanīti means the science of politics
or polity. Cf. Raghu Vaṁśa, XVIII. 46 etc.
(6) U. N. Ghoshal suggests that in Kauṭilya's
Arthaśāstra a distinction is maintained between
Daṇḍanīti and Arthaśāstra. Arthaśāstra is con-
cerned with the art of government in the widest
sense of the term including central and local
administration, internal and external policy,
civil and criminal laws and the art of warfare.
But Daṇḍanīti is defined as comprising only
policy and impolicy. Hence according to the
earlier conceptions of these terms, Daṇḍanīti
is only a branch of Arthanīti (vide U.N. Ghoshal.⠀
HIPI. p. 83 f.). This authority further main-
tains that 'this distinction is obliterated in fact
as well as in name in the Mahābhārata and later
works.' (Ibid).
(7) In our opinion no such distinction is implied
in the AŚ. Non-mention of Arthaśāstra as a Vidyā
by Kauṭilya rather suggests that he wants to
mean Arthaśāstra by the term Daṇḍanīti itself.
(8) 'pṛithivyā lābhapālanopāyaḥ śāstram arthā-
śāstram (AŚ XV. 1).--This definition of Arthaśā-
stra compared with the description of Daṇḍanīti
as 'alabdhalābhārthā, labdhaparirakśaṇī, vṛddh-
asya tīrtheṣu pratipādanī ca' seems to suggest an
identity of the two.</p>
<pb n="109" />
<p>(9) Our notes on Daṇḍa would show that various
connotations of the term Daṇḍa are accepted even
by the same authority. As such, the description
of Daṇḍanīti, as comprising of policy and im-
policy, in consideration of a narrower connota-
tion of the term Daṇḍa may be justified even
though Daṇḍanītī, with a wider connotation of
Daṇḍa, may be identical with Arthaśāstra.
(10) =Rājanīti (cf. A. L. Basham, The Wonder
that was India, p. 79).
(11) This science is also called Rāja-śāstra in the
Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva. (vide, Jayaswal,
Hindu Polity, p. 5).
(12) Mitakṣarā on Yājñvalkya. I. 313, gives
the meaning of Daṇḍanīti as Arthaśāstra.
DAṆḌAPARUṢYA—(1) An assault. It is a legally
punishable offence. cf. AŚ. II. 27.
(2) Kauṭilya names three varieties of it. They
are Sparśana (touching the body of the opponent
by way of assault with hand, foot, etc), Avagūr-
ṇa (showing weapons like lances by way of
attempting to assault) and Prahata (physical
assault with any weapon). (See AŚ III. 19).
(3) Hard or cruel infliction of punishment. In
this sense it is one of the Krodhaja Vyasanas
(see Manu Saṁ. VII. 48).
DAṆḌAPĀLA--(1) One of the 18 Tīrthas or Mahā-
mātras (see AŚ I. 18).
(2) = Daṇḍanādhikārī given in the Tilaka com.
(as one of the Tīrthas) under Rāmāyaṇa II.
100.36.</p>
<pb n="110" />
<p>(3) He functioned probably as a head magistr-
ate. (Cf. Apte, Students' Sansk. Eng. Dic. p. 244).
(4) This officer was more probably the Com-
mander of a certain number of soldiers-since
the term Daṇḍa as used in Daṇḍasampat means
Bala or soldiers (see AŚ VI. 1).
DAṆḌASAMPAT--The desirable qualities of an
ideal lot of soldiers. (AŚ VI. 1).
DATTA--(1) A boy willingly given away for good
by his parents and adopted by another person as
his son. In time of giving away the offer is to
be made with a formal ritual of touching water
(adbhiḥ). cf. mātāpitṛbhyām adbhir datto dattaḥ.
(AŚ III. 7). Manu Saṁ IX. 159, also gives the term as Datta,
(2) Cf. Manu Saṁ IX. 168, where this son is
called Dattrima.
(3) Find the term Dattrima also in Manu Saṁ.
VII. 415.
(4) Also called Dattaka. cf. Yājñavalkya II. 130.
DATTAKA--See Datta.
DATTRIMA--See Datta.
DAŚAGRĀMĪ—(1) A cluster of ten villages. (AŚ
II. 35).
(2) An officer (i.e. a Gopa) in charge of ten
villages. (AŚ IV. 13).
DĀNA--Bribery or gift. It is one of the four
Upāyas (q.v.) or expedients for overcoming the
enemies. Kauṭilya calls it Upāpradāna and
explains it as doing good of the enemy with the</p>
<pb n="111" />
<p>gift of wealth (artha). Cf. Upapradānam arthopa-
kāraḥ (AŚ II. 10).
DĀMARIKA--A riotous person (AŚ IV. 9).
DĀYABHĀGA--Partition of inheritance; division
of property among heirs.
DĀYĀDA--(1) One who is entitled to inheritance
or a share of patrimony (AŚ III. 2, Yājñavalkya
II. 118, Manu Saṁ, VIII. 160), an heir.
(2) An heiress is called Dāyāda or Dāyādī.
DĀSA--A slave, who is purchased for life-time with
a lump sum. Such a slave can be re-sold and he
may also regain freedom on payment of his price
to the master (AŚ III. 13).
DŪTA--(1) In AŚ I. 16, Kauṭilya describes the
functions of a Dūta. Accordingly the term may
mean a messenger or, an envoy, or, an am-
bassador or, an emissary.
(2) Taking the term in general Kauṭilya classi-
fies Dūta into three types, viz. Nisṛṣṭārtha (i.e.,
one who has all the qualities of an Amātya),
Parimitārtha (i.e., one who possesses three-
fourths of the qualities of an Amātya) and
Śāsanahara (i.e., one who possesses half the
qualities of an Amātya) (AŚ I. 16).
(3) According to K. P. Jayaswal the term Dūta,
as used in Manu Saṁhitā, VII. 65-66 and Rāmā-
8....................................................dūte sandhiviparyayau.
dūta eva hi sandhatte bhinattyeva ca saṁhatān dūtastat
Kurute Karma bhidyante yena mānavāh.</p>
<pb n="112" />
<p>yaṇa, II. 100.25 and Śukranītisāra, refers to a
Minister of Diplomacy. kaccijjanapado vidvān dakṣiṇaḥ pratibhānavān yathoktavādī
dūtaste kṛto bharata paṇḍitaḥ. Possibly Jayaswal has Śukranītisāra, II. 87 in mind, which reads as follows--
ingitākāraceṣṭajñaḥ śrutimān deśa-kālavit
ṣāḍguṇyamantravidvāgmī vītabhīrudūa iṣyate.
Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 285. It is further pointed
out by Jayaswal that in Gupta times, the term
Sāndhivigrahika came to be used in place of
the term Dūta in the sense of a Minister of Diplo-
macy, for making a distinction between the
Minister of Diplomacy from the Ambassador. Jayaswal. Ibid, p. 307.
(4) A careful examination of the quotations
given here should show that the term means
either a simple messenger or, at best, an ambassa-
dor but not a Mantri or Minister at all. Rāmā-
yaṇa clearly says that the Dūta should deliver
the message as it is (yathoktavādī), We need not
probably equate Dūta with the Sāndhivigrahika,
because of the latter term's similarity with
Manu's words dute sandhi viparyayau. Manu
possibly means to say that treaty or conflict
depend on the proper delivery of the message or
proper diplo matic activities of the ambassador.
(5) According to Amara, Dūta is simply 'a
carrier of the message'. syāt sandeśaharo dūtaḥ (Amara, Kṣatriya varga).
DURGA—(1) A fort. Cf. T. V. Mahalingam, Administration and Social Life
under Vijayanagara (Index).</p>
<pb n="113" />
<p>(2) =The Fort in the sense of the capital as
opposed to Janapada, Rāṣṭra or Deśa in the
sense of the rest of the country. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 230.
(3) One of the seven constituent elements of
the state (see Saptāṅga or Saptaprakṛtayaḥ).
(4) In AŚ II. 3, Kauṭilya discusses in detail
as to how a Durga is to be constructed. He
suggests four types of Durga, viz., Audaka-Durga,
Pārvvata-Durga, Dhānvana-Durga and Vana-
Durga.
(5) Manu discusses the varieties and equipments
of Durga in MS. VIII 69-76. According to
Manu there are six varieties of Durga, viz.
Dhanur-Durga, Mahī-Durga, Ap-Durga, Vārkṣa-
Durga, Nṛ-Durga and Giri-Durga. (MS VII.
70).
(6) Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva (86.5) also gives
six varieties, viz. Dhanva, Mahī-, Giri-, Man-
uṣya-,- Mṛd-, and Vana-Durga. Similar lists of varieties of Durga are given by Viṣṇu
Saṁhitā (III-6), Agni Purāṇa (222. 4-5) Matsya-Purana (216,
6-7) and Rāmāyaṇa, Laṅkā Kāṇḍa 3, 20-22 etc. For details
see P. C. Chakravarty, The Art of War in Ancient India, p. 134 ff.
(7) The term Durga also means the revenue
collected by the Samāhartā from some 22 sources
viz. Sulka, Danda, Patava, etc. detailed in AŚ
II. 6.
DURGAPĀLA--(1) The Chief Officer in charge of
the protection of the Forts.
(2) One of the 18 Tīrthas (q.v.).</p>
<pb n="114" />
<p>DURGA SAMPAT--(1) Wealth and equipments
of an ideal fort.
(2) Vide AŚ VI. 1 for a reference and AŚ II. 3
for details.
DŪṢYA--(1) Seditious, as in the expression dūṣya-
mahāmātra in AŚ V. 1.
(2) Any state employee or any citizen engaged
in sedition.
DAUVĀRIKA--The chief door-keeper of the royal
household. He is one of the 18 Mahāmātras.
(q.v.).
DROṆAMUKHA—A central town in a block of
four hundred villages. catuḥśatagrāmyā droṇamukham (AŚ II. 1).
One court of justice under a Dharmastha is to be located in such a town.
(AŚ III. 1).
DVAIDHAM--See Dvaidhibhāva.
DVAIDHĪBHĀVA—(1) Duplicity.
(2) It is also called Dvaidha.
(3) It is one of the six modes of foreign policy
(see Ṣāḍguṇya).
(4) Kauṭilya explains that it is the strategy of
pursuing the policy of peace (sandhi) and the
policy of hostility (vigraha) at the same time.
Cf. sandhi-vigrahopādānaṁ dvaidhībhāvaḥ (AŚ
VII. 1).
(5) Kulluka or Manu Saṁ. VII. 160 and Mītak-
ṣarā on Yūjñavalkya Smṛti I. 347, explain this
svārthasiddhaye svabalasya dvidhākaraṇaṁ dvaidhībhāvah
dvaidhībhāvaḥ svabalasya dvidhākaraṇam.</p>
<pb n="115" />
<p>term as 'dividing one's army into two'. The
idea, as it may be gathered from Kulluka's
com. on Manu Saṁhitā VII. 173, is possibly
that, it is the policy of keeping the enemy enga-
ged with one half of the army, while remaining
safe in the own fort with the other half.
DVAIRĀJYA--(1) The rule of two.
(2) A state ruled by two kings at the same time.
(3) This term occurs in the Jaina (Ācārāṅgsūtra,
quoted under Gaṇarajya (q.v.).
(4) There existed such a state at Patala in Sindh
in Alexander's time, "where the sovereignty
was vested in two different kings hailing from
different houses". Mc Crindle, The Invasion of India by Alexander the Great,
p. 296, referred to by Altekar, SGAI, p. 38, n. 1.
(5) It is different from a Viruddha-rājya state,
presumably by being ruled by two kings acting
in harmony, while in the Viruddharājya the
country is ruled by two contending rulers.
(6) While making an assessment of the relative
merits of Dvairājya and Vairājya, Kauṭilya
observes that the two kings in a Dvairājya often
happen to be a father and a son, or two brothers.
As such there is always a party of Yoga-Kṣema
(q. v.), and the Amatyas also remain under con-
trol in a Dvairājya. pitāputrayorbhrātrorvā dvairājyaṁ tulyayoga-kṣemam
amātyāvagrahaṁ vartayateti (AŚ VIII. 2).  This is how, according to
Kauṭilya, Dvairājya is superior to Vairājya.
(q.v.). It may be noted that Kauṭilya here does</p>
<pb n="116" />
<p>not denounce a Dvairājya. The passage which
has led Altekar to observe that "the Arthaśāstra
does not approve of it" and Jayaswal to believe
that Kauṭilya himself characterises Dvairājya
"as a constitution of rivalry and mutual conflict
leading to final destruction", in fact, contains
the view of the Ācārya and not of Kauṭilya him-
self. dvairājyam anyonya-pakṣa-dveṣāṇurāgābhyāṁ paraspara-
saṁgharṣeṇa vā vinaśyati (AŚ VIII. 2). Altekar, Ibid. p. 38. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 81. Kauṭilya quotes the above view of the
Ācārya only to say a no against it. Cf. dvairājya-vairājyayoḥ dvairājyam anyonyapakṣa-
dveṣānurāgābhyāiṁ parasparasamgharṣeṇa vā vinaśyati.
vairājyaṁ tu prakṛticittagrahaṇāpekṣi yathāsthitam anyair
bhujyate ityācāryaḥ, netikauṭilyah. (AŚ. VIII. 2).
This extract shows that it is the opinion of the
Ācārya (and not of Kauṭilya) that a Dvairājya meets
destruction through mutual hatred etc. This ex-
tract further shows that the reference to Dvairājya
occurs in the context of a comparative assessment
of Dvairājya and Vairājya. That both remarks
about Dvāirājya and Vāirājya embody the opinion
of the Ācārya is clear from the particle tu in the
sentence vairājyam tu etc. R. Shamasastry attri-
butes to the Ācārya only the remark on Vairājya.
(See AS. Trans., p. 353). This rendering is not
happy. R. G. Basak's Bengali translation of the
above extract gives both the remarks as the view of
the Ācārya. (AŚ. Bengali, Vol. II., p. 178).</p>
<pb n="117" />
<p>DHANIKA--A creditor (AŚ III. 11, Manu Saṁ.
VIII. 51. Yūjñavalkya, II. 55.
DHĀNVANA-DURGA--(1) Desert Fort (vide AŚ
II. 3).
(2) =Maru Durga of Viṣṇu Saṁhitā III. 6.
(3) Dhanva Durga of Mahābhārata Śānti Parva,
86.5 and Manu Saṁ. VII. 70. The reading dhanurdurgāṇi in Manu Saṁ, VII. 70
seems to be a corruption for dhanvadurgam.
(4) This fort remains surrounded by deserts and
devoid of water for five Yojanas. Vide, S. C. Banerji, A Glossary of Smṛti Literature, p. 56.
DHARMA--(1) Righteousness as in the Asokan
Inscriptions. Cf. iyami dhamma lipi=iyaṁ dharmalipih (dharmānu-
vardhakaḥ lekhaḥ); Asoka's first rock edict, Girnar version.
Vide D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 15 f.
(2) 'Religious and ritualistic law as well as rules
of morality and prudence' as in the term
Dharmaśāstra. Cf. A. S. Altekar. SGAI, p. 259.
(3) Virtue, being one of the four ends of human
existence. Cf. dharmārthāvirodhena kāmaṁ seveta (AŚ I. 7).
(4) =Dharmaśāstra, sacred canon, being one of
the four sources of the state law. Cf. AŚ III. 1. (See Vivā-
dapada).
DHARMAVIJAYA--(1) Conquest by righteous-
ness. Asoka advocates such a type of conquest</p>
<pb n="118" />
<p>for descendants in the Rock Edict XIII. (i) ayaṁ ca mukhyamataḥ vijayaḥ devāṇāṁ priyasy yaḥ dharmavijayaḥ (line 8).
(ii) taṁ ca eva vijayaṁ te manyantāṁ yaḥ dharma-vijayaḥ
(lines 11 and 12). The Sanskrit renderings are by
D. C. Sircar. (See Select Inscriptions, p. 36 f.). From
what is given in this Rock Edict, we may con-
clude that this type of conquest is a purely moral
and cultural conquest devoid of any use of arms.
(2) According to Kauṭilya, however, Dharma-
vijaya is also a conquest by arms; but it is
characterised by the conqueror's being satisfied
simply by the recognition of his suzerainty by
the defeated king. Cf. teṣāṁ abhyavapattyā dharmavijayāī tuṣyati (AŚ XIII. 1.)
(3) Kālidasa's concept of Dharmavijaya is very
near to Kauṭilya's conception of Lobhavijaya,
in. so far as Kālidasa's Dharmavijayī takes the
wealth of the defeated King, though he does not
grab the land of the defeated king and also does
not keep him a captive. Cf. gṛhītapratimuktasya sa dharmavijayī nṛpaḥ śriyaṁ
mahendra nāthasya jahāra natu medinīm. (Raghuvaṁśa. IV. 43).
See also Altekar SGAI. p. 295 and Ghoshal, A History of Indian
Political Ideas, p. 303 f. n. 5.
DHARMAVIJAYĪ--(1) One of the three kinds of
conquerors, the other two being Lobhavijayī and
Asuravijayī. (AŚ XII. 1).
(2) This type of conqueror indulges only in
Dharmavijaya, (q.v.) and he becomes content
simply by the formal recognition of his authority
by the defeated king. teṣāmabhyavapattyā dharma-vijayī tuṣyati (AŚ XII. 1).</p>
<pb n="119" />
<p>DHARMASTHA--A judicial magistrate of the sta-
tus of an Amatya. (AŚ III. 1). He is mainly
concerned with the civil suits. Only such
Amātyas who pass the test of virtue (Dharmo-
padhā) are to be appointed Dharmasthas.
Cf. tatra dharmopadhā-śuddhān dharmasthīya-
kaṇṭakaśodhaneṣu sthāpayet. (AŚ I. 10).
DHARMASTHĪA--The section of the Arthaśastra
devoted to the functions of the Dharmastha. See
Dharmastha and AŚ III. 1.
DHARMOPADHĀ--Test of virtue. (See Upadhā).
This is actually a test of loyalty of the Amātyas.
The Purohita picks up a sham quarrel with the
King and brings an allegation that the King is
'unvirtuous', and pleads that he should be re-
moved from the throne. If an Amātya does not
take side with the Purohita then he is supposed
to have passed in the test of virtue. (AŚ I. 10).
DHĀRAṆAKA--See Dhāraṇika.
DHĀRAṆIKA--(1) A dobtor (AŚ III. 11).
(2) =Dhāraṇaka, (Yājñavalkya, II. 3.63).
DHĪ-SACIVA--A minister for counsel (opposite to
Karmasaciva, who is a minister for action or
execution). See Saciva.
NĀGARAKA--Same as Nāgarika.
NĀGARIKA--(1) City governor. The Samāhartā
is the counterpart of the Nāgarika in respect of
the administration of the countryside. Samāhartṛvannāgarika nagaraṁ cintayet (AŚ II. 36).</p>
<pb n="120" />
<p>(2) He should look after various civic affairs of
the city with the assistance of the two subordi-
nate officers called Gopa and Sthānika. Through
them the Nāgarika would keep a record of the
city population and the income and expenditure
of the respective families. He is also to look
after such civic affairs as the prevention of fire
accidents. (AŚ II. 36).
(3) He is one of the 18 Mahāmātras.
(4) Same as Nāgaraka. Cf. D. C. Sircar, (Glossary, p. 208).
(5) Same as Purapāla. Cf. Basham, The Wonder that was India, pp. 103 f.
NĀYAKA—(1) A military officer at the head of ten
Senāpatis. Cf. taddaśakasyaiko nāyaka iti. (AŚ
X 6).
(2) According to a variant reading in AŚ I. 12,
we should read Nāyaka in place of Nāgarika
in the list of 18 Mahāmātras, and as such this
Nāyaka is to be reckoned as a Mahāmātra.
NĀVADHYAKṢA--Superintendent of marine and
riverine services. (AŚ II. 28).
NIKṢEPA--Gold or other such valuables deposited
with goldsmith etc. for making ornaments, etc.
(AŚ III. 12).
NIMNAYODHĪ--A soldier who fights remaining in
water or other such place lower than the level of
the surface of earth (AŚ VII. 10).
NIYOGA--The act of begetting a child by a child-
less widow through an intercourse with the
brother or any near kinsman of her deceased
husband, as permitted by the Law.</p>
<pb n="121" />
<p>Cf. devarādvā sapiṇḍādvā striyā samyaṅ niyuktayā
prajepsitā dhigantavyā santānasya parikṣaye
(Manu Saṁ. 9. 59).
The word niyoga is mentioned in Manu Saṁ.
9.61 and 9.62.
NIVEŚANA—Marriage of a widow with a second
husband. (AŚ III. 2, etc.).
NIŚĀNTA--The royal abode (AŚ I. 20.).
NIṢĀDA--See Pārāśava.
NISṚṢTĀRTHA--Dūta--One of the three main
varieties of Dūta. He possesses all the desirable
qualities of an Amātya in full.
Cf. amātyasampad upeto nisṛṣtārthaḥ. (AŚ. I.
16).
NĪTI--(1) Derived from the root nī the word means
proper guidance or direction. For the derivation of the word nīti from root nī.
Cf. daṇḍena nīyate cedaṁ daṇḍaṁ nayati vā puṇaḥ daṇḍanītir
iti khyātā trinlokān abhivartate (Mahābhārata. Śānti Parva, 59-78).
Hence it means the code of ethics and wisdom.
Cf. the title, Nītiśataka of one of the works of
Bhartṛhari.
(2) Most probably as an abbreviation of the term
Rājanīti the present word means the science of
politics.
Cf. the title Nītikalpataru of a work on politics
by Lakṣmīdhara (1150 A.D.).
NĪTI-ŚĀSTRA--Science of polity or of general
good conduct.
NĪVĪ--(1) Remainder after deducting expenditure
from income. (vide AŚ II. 6).</p>
<pb n="122" />
<p>(2) Capital invested in some business (vide AŚ
III. 20).
NṚ-DURGA--See Manuṣya Durga.
NṚPA-ŚĀSTRA--The science of politics.
NYĀYAKARAṆIKA--The officer responsible for
settling disputes regarding a gift land. (vide
Nidhanpur C. P. Grant of Bhāskaravarma).
PAKṢA--(1) Usually given in duel number as
PAKṢAU.
(2) =The frontal two parts of a mass of army
which is recommended to be divided into frontal
two parts, hinder two parts and a middle part.
(See Maṇḍala, Urasya, Kakṣa and cf. AŚ X.
5, X. 6, etc.).
PAÑCAGRĀMĪ--(1) A cluster of five villages (AŚ
II. 5).
(2) An officer (i.e., a Gopa) in charge of five villa-
ges. (AŚ IV. 13).
PAÑCAMAHĀVĀDYA--See Pañcasmahā-śabda,
(1).
PAÑCAMAHĀŚABDA—(1) The five types of mu-
sical instruments which were used to greet some
higher officials indicating their higher status.
The five musical instruments were Śṛiṅga or
trumpet, ṭammata or tabour, śaṅkha or conch-
shell used as a horn, bherī or kettledrum and
jayaghaṇṭā or gong. K. B. Pathak, Indian Antiquary, Vol. XII, p. 95 f.
This meaning of the term</p>
<pb n="123" />
<p>was followed in the South India. D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 230. In this sense the term Pañcamāhavādya was also used.
(2) =The five official designations, beginning
with the word mahā, which could be applied
simultaneously to an officer indicating his higher
status. The five designations might have been
some of the titles like, Mahāsāmanta, Mahā-
pratīhāra, Mahādaṇḍanāyaka, Mahāmantrī,
Mahādoḥsādhanika, etc. P. N. Bhattacharya, Kāmarupaśāsanāvalī, p. 42. This meaning of the term was followed in the Northern India. D. C. Sircar, loc. cit.
PAŅA--(1) A coin of silver or copper. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 102. Kauṭilya in AŚ V. 3 gives a long list of officials who are to
be paid various salaries in Paṇas, fixed by him.
(2) In AŚ II. 12 it is instructed that the Paṇa
is to be made mainly with silver with one-fourth
quantity of copper and one-sixth part of anyone
of a few other metals, viz. Tīkṣṇa, Trapu, Sīsā
and Añjana. Cf. lakṣaṇādhyakṣaḥ caturbhāgatāmraṁ rupyarupaṁ tīkṣṇa-
trapu-sīsā-njanā-nāmanyatama-māṣa-vijyauktaṁ kārayet. paṇam
ardhapaṇaṁ padam aṣṭabhāgam iti (AŚ II. 12).
Cf. also Shamasastry, AŚ. Trans., p. 86,
PAṆYĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of markets.
He was required to organise the sale of govern-
ment products (i.e., the products of the public
sector) and to organise the import of goods
needed for the locality. The details of his duties
are given in AŚ II. 16.
PATTANA--A port or a seaside town. (AŚ II. 28).
PATTI--(1) A foot soldier.</p>
<pb n="124" />
<p>(2) One of the four constituents of the Caturaṅ-
gabala (i.e., the four-fold army).
(3) In the above two senses same as Padāti.
(4) Patti also means the smallest division of an
army consisting of one chariot, one elephant,
three horse-men and five foot-soldiers. See, P. C. Chakravarti, The Art of War in Ancient India, pp. 83 f. The implication of this term, as a small division of
army, varies from authority to authority. In Mahābhārata,
Udyogaparva 154, 28, it is said that 'a Patti has five times
fifty men'. According to one Nītiprakāśaka of Vaiśampāyana,
the Patti has the smallest division of army and consists of one
chariot, ten elephants, one thousand horses, and one lac of foot-
soldiers.
Cf. ekebhaikarathā tryaśvā pattiḥ pañcapadātikā
(Amarakośa, Ksatriyavarga). Also cf. Mahā-
bhārata, Adiparva, 2, 19.
PATTIVYŪHA--A battle-order (Vyūha) made of
foot-soldiers (Patti).
PATTYADHYAKṢA--Superintendent of foot-sol-
diers. He was to arrange for the training of all
the varieties of foot-soldiers. (AŚ II. 33).
PADĀTI--(1) Foot-soldier.
(2) = Patti.
PADIKA--A military officer who is at the head of
ten chariots and ten elephants. Cf. aṅgadaśaka-
syaikaḥ patiḥ padikaḥ (AŚ X. VI). Though
there are four Aṅgas included in the term Catur-
aṅga, here the word refers to chariots and ele-
phants alone. (AŚ Basak, II. p. 260). What
should be the number of horses and footmen
corresponding to the number of chariots and</p>
<pb n="125" />
<p>elephants, to be under a Padika is told in AŚ
X. 5.
PARASPAROPAKĀRASANDARŚANAM--One of
the five varieties of Sāma (conciliation). It is
an act of conciliation based on a reference to the
mutual good rendered to each other of the parties
concerned. Kauṭilya describes it as anyonyopakā-
rasaṁkīrtana (AŚ II 10).
PARIMITĀRTHA-DŪTA—A second class Dūta,
who lacks in one-fourth of the ideal qualities of
an Amātya. Cf. pādaguṇahīṇaḥ parimitārthaḥ
(AŚ I. 16).
PARIHĀRA—Exemption from paying tax (AŚ
III. 9).
PARYUPĀSANA--The act of surrounding the fort
of the enemy. (AŚ XIII. 4).
PAŚCĀTKOPA--Antagonism fanned up behind a
King who is out in an expedition. Such an
antagonism is fanned up by already disaffected
persons, enemies and forest rulers.
Cf. alpaṁ paścātkopaṁ prayātasya dūṣyāmitrā-
tavikā hi sarvataḥ samedhayanti. (AŚ IX. 3).
PĀRAMEṢṬHYA--A type of monarchy.
This term occurs severally in the Aitareya Brāh-
maņa (VIII. 14 to VIII. 19) in the context of the
Indramahābhiseka. The term is often followed
by the term Prājāpatya. From Sāyaṇa's Com.
this term may be taken to mean the attainment
of the Prajapatiloka after a glorious tenor of
Kingship on earth. In Aitareya Brāhmaṇa,
VIII. 14 we have the expression Pārameṣṭhyaṁ
Rājyam, and there also, the term most probably
means a Kingship (i.e., rājya or the status of a</p>
<pb n="126" />
<p>King) like that of the Parameṣṭhī, who is des-
cribed to be Prājāpatya (or Prājāpatisambandhī),
as explained by Sāyaṇa.
PĀRĀŚAVA--(1) Son of a Brāhmaṇa from a
Śūdra woman.</p>
<p>(2) =Niṣāda. (AŚ III. 6, III. 7, etc.)</p>
<p>PARVATA DURGA—(1) Hill Fort (vide AŚ II. 3).
(2) =Giri-Durga of Mbh. Śānti 86.5 and Manu
Saṁ. VII. 70 etc.
PĀRṢNIGRĀHA--(1) One of the Kings forming
the circle of allies and enemies in the Maṇḍala
Theory.
(2) An enemy in the rear. When the Aggressor
(Vijīgiṣu), the central figure in the Maṇḍala
(q.v.) starts in a military expedition, this king,
with his territory lying immediately adjacent
to that of the Aggressor, attacks the latter from
behind. (AŚ VI. 2). Cf. Vijīgiṣorariṁ prati niryātasya yaḥ pṛṣṭhavartī nṛpati
deśākramaṇā-dyācarati sa pārṣṇigrāhaḥ. (Kulluka's com. on
Manu Saṁ. VII. 207).
PĀRṢṆIGRĀHĀSĀRA--(1) One the Kings for-
ming the circle of allies and enemies according
to the Maṇḍala Theory.
(2) This King stands fourth to the Aggressor,
Vijīgiṣu (q.v.), the central figure in the circle,
from behind.
(3) This King is separated from the Pārṣṇigrāha
(q.v.) by the Ākranda (q.v.) and he plays the
role of an ally to the Pārṣṇigrāha and of an
enemy to the Vijīgiṣu (AŚ VI. 2).</p>
<pb n="127" />
<p>PALĀGALA--(1) One of the eleven Ratnins (q.v.)
(2) As such the term means either 'the royal
courier' or the King's bosom companion corres-
ponding to the Vidūṣaka (the royal jester) of
later times. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 196. "His uniform was a red
turban and leather quivers", says Jayaswal. From this the
meaning as "royal courier" seems to be more reasonable.
Altekar, SGAI, p. 162.
PĀṢAṆDA---(1) The followers of the sects and reli-
gions other than the orthodox Hindu religion.
(AŚ III. 16). Cf. Manu Saṁ, IX. 225.
(2) =Pakhaṇḍa (cf. Malatīmādhava, V. 24).
PĪḌANĪYA--One of the four varieties of enemy,
the other three varieties being Yātavya, Ucched-
anīya and Karśanīya. Contrary to the condi-
tions under which an enemy is reckoned as
Ucchedanīya, if the enemy is endowed with
shelter (i.e., a fort and an ally) and stronger
shelter, he is to be reckoned as Pīḍanīya, i.e.,
fit to be troubled by reducing his arms.
Cf. viparyaye pīdanīyaḥ karśanīyo vā. (AŚ VI.
2).
PUTRIKĀPUTRA—(1) A daughter's son, who by
agreement becomes the son of the father, who is
otherwise son-less. (Manu Saṁ. IX. 127).
(2) Kauṭilya considers a Putrikāputra to be as
good as an Aurasaputra.
Cf. tena tulyaḥ putrikāputraḥ (AŚ III. 7).
(3) Also called Putrikāsuta.
PURAPĀLA--(1) A city governor. He was also
responsible for the cleanliness of the streets and</p>
<pb n="128" />
<p>the prevention of fire and for civic measures
against such disasters as famine, flood and
plague. One such governor was Cakrapalita,
during the reign of Skanda Gupta in C. 455 A.D. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 104.
Cf. Junagarh Rock Inscription of Skandagupta,
line 27.
(2) Same as Nāgaraka or Nāgarika.
PUSTA--A Record book or account book. Cf. AŚ
II. 7.
PUROHITA--(1) The Royal Chaplain.
(2) In Vedic age the Purohita was one of the
eleven Ratnins (Vide, Śatapatha-Brāhmaṇa, V.
3.1).
(3) Yājñavalkya Smṛti (I. 312) suggests that
the King should consult privately with the
Purohita before coming to a final decision on
important matters. Cf. "taiḥ sārdhaṁ cintayed rājyaṁ vipreṇātha tatah svayam"
(Yājñavalkya, I. 312), where Vipreṇa-brāhmaṇena=purohitena,
according to the Miṭākṣarā Com. The qualities of a Purohita
are given in the following two verses of the Yājñavalkya Samṛti.
(4) According to Ápastamba Dharma Sūtra (II.5.
10. 13-14) the Purohita was expected to be well
versed in both sacred law and politics. He was
to judge cases where some Prāyaścitta was in-
volved as the punishment or where some brah-
min stood as the accused.
(5) Kauṭilya maintains a difference between
Mantrī and Purohita as indicated by the title
of the Chapter AŚ I. 9 (i.e., Mantri-purohitot-
patti). According to Kauṭilya, the Purohita
should be learned in Vedas and Vedāṅgas, astro-</p>
<pb n="129" />
<p>logy and politics and he should be capable of
averting the (national or political) calamities
caused by human or heavenly agencies. purohitam....saḍaṅge, vede, daive nimitte, daṇḍanītyāṁ ca abhivinītaṁ āpadāṁ daivamānuṣīṇām ātharvabhirupāyaiś ca
pratikartāraṁ kurvīta (AŚ I. 9).
(6) According to Śukranītisāra, (II. 80) the
Purohita should be well versed in ethics and the
science of weapons and army arrangements. nitiśāstrāstravyūhādikuśalastupurohitaḥ.
(7) According to a view, recorded by Śukra, the
Purohita is the Minister of Religion in a council
of ten Ministers. Vide, K. P. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 282.</p>
<p>(8) In AŚ I. 12, Kauṭilya mentions (Purohita)</p>
<p>in the second place in a list of 18 Mahāmātras
(or Tīrthas).
(9) Purodhā is another term for Purohita. purodhāstu purohitaḥ (Amara Kṣatri-ya varga).
(10) According to Mbh. Santi. 73.1, the Purohita
should be very learned and the king should
consult him in matters relating to Dharma
and Artha. rājnā purohitaḥ kāryo bhaved vidvān bahuśrutah ubhau
samikṣya dharmārthāvaprameyā-vanantaram (Mbh. Śānti. 73.1).
PŪRVA-SĀHASA-DAṆḌA--(1) A fine ranging
between fortyeight and nintysix Paṇas (AŚ
III. 18). aṣṭacatvārimśatpaṇāvaraṁ sanna-vatiparaḥ pūrvasāhasadeṇ-
ḍah. This fine is referred to also as Prathama-
Sāhasa-Daṇḍa in other literature.
(2) Manu calls it Prathama-Sāhasa and fixes the
penalty at 250 Paṇas. Manu Saṁ. VIII. 138.</p>
<pb n="130" />
<p>PAUTAVĀDHYAKṢA--The Controller of weights
and measures. (AŚ II. 19). This officer was
required to supervise the making of the measur-
ing instruments (Pautava) and to ensure the
preciseness of the instruments.
PAUNARBHAVA--(1) The son of a woman from
her first husband, if already born in time of her
marriage with another, becomes a Paunarbhava
son to the second husband. Cf. punarbhūtāyāḥ
paunarbhava (AŚ III. 7). Cf. also Manu Saṁ,
III. 155.
(2) In Manu Saṁ, IX. 176 the second husband
of a woman is called Paunarbhava.
PAURA(S)--The citizens belonging to the cities
and presumably to the enlightened society, as
opposed to Jānapadas, the rural folk. Vide, Satkari Mookerjee, 'Political Wisdom of Ancient India,' Journal of the Bihar Research Society, XXXXV. parts
1-IV. December, 1959.
PAURAVYĀVAHĀRIKA—A judge appointed to
hear cases in the cities. His salary is fixed at
12000 Paṇas annually. (AŚ V. 3).
PRAKĀŚA YUDDHA--An open fight between
two parties in an appointed place and time.
Cf. prakāśayuddhaṁ nirdiṣṭo deśekāle ca vibhra-
maḥ (AŚ VII. 6 verse 8).
PRAKṚTI--(1) The term is often used in plural
as PRAKṚTAYAH. This term has various
meanings as follows.
(2) Subjects (of a king) as in Śakuntalā 7.35. pravartātaṁ prākrtihitāya pārthivaḥ</p>
<pb n="131" />
<p>(3) King's ministers or counsellors as in Raghu-
vaṁśa 12. 12 (cf. Apte, p. 351). athānāthāh prakṛtayo mātṛbandhunivaśinam
maulairānāy- ayāmāsurbharataṁ stambhitāśrubhih.
(4) The Ksatriya community as in Ep. Ind. Vol.
IX (cf. Glossary, p. 255).
(5) Seven chief officials of the King according
to Nilakantha's commentary on Mahābhārata,
Sabhaparvan, 5-23. kaccit prakṛtayaḥ sapta na luptā bharatarṣabha
āḍhyāstathā vyasaninaḥ svānuraktaśca sarvaśaḥ. The officials are, Durgā-
dhyakṣa (commandant of the citadel), Bālādhy-
akṣa (Chief of the army staff), Dharmādhyakṣa
(Chief of the departments of charity and justice),
Camūpati (Commander of the army in the
field), Purodhā (the Chaplain), Vaidya (Physi-
cian) and the Daivajña (Astrologer). ....tatra svamirupa prakṛtiḥ saptavidhā durgādhyakṣo
balādhyakṣo dharmādhyakṣaśca bhupati purodhā vaidyadaivajñau
sapta prakṛtayaḥ smṛtā iti proktāh.</p>
<p>(6) Ministers (Amātyas) and citizens (pauras)</p>
<p>according to Kātyāyana, quoted by Kṣīrasvā-
min in his commentary of Amarakośa. amātyaścāpi paurāśca sadbhih prakṛtayaḥ smṛtāḥ.
(7) The seven elements of the state and the asso-
ciations (śreṇayaḥ) of the citizens (pauras),
according to Amarakośa, Kṣatriyavarga. rājyāngāni prakṛtayaḥ paurāṇāṁ śreṇayopi ca. See also Saptānga and Sapta-prakṛtayaḥ. (See
Sapta-Prakṛtayaḥ and Saptāṅga).
(8) K.P. Jayaswal, with reference to Śukranīti-
sāra, II. 3, observes" .... Prakṛtis must
sabhyādhikāri-prakṛtī-sabhāsatasmate sthitah
sarvadā syān- nroah prājñaḥ svamate na kadācana</p>
<pb n="132" />
<p>necessarily signify the People or Subjects mean-
ing thereby their representatives-the chiefs
of the Paura and Janapada". Hindu Polity, p. 288.
(9) The term continues to be in vogue till a
much later time. In the Borgaon C.P. Grant
of king Ratnapāla of Kāmarūpa (11th century
A.D.) it is observed that when Sri Tyagasimha,
the twenty-first king of the family of Salastam-
bha expired without an heir, his prakṛtis (prakṛt-
ayaḥ) chose Brahmapala of the family of Naraka
to be the king. P. C. Chaudhury takes the
term prakṛtayaḥ in the sense of 'important offi-
cials'. History of Civilization of Assam, p. 227. M. M. Sharma translates the term as
'subjects', and suggests that it is obvious that
the will of the subjects must have been translated
into action by the 'top officials' or the 'council of
ministers' as 'their representatives'.  Inscriptions of Ancient Assam, Introduction, p. XX. 1., (MS seen through courtesy).
(10) Like Amara calling the seven elements of
State Prakṛti, Kauṭilya applies the term to the
seven mutually beneficial elements of the State,
viz. Svāmī (the King), Amātya (Ministers),
Janapada (the territory along with the people),
Durga (the fort), Kośa (the exchequer), Daṇḍa
(the military power or force) and Mitra (allies).
Cf. svāmyamātyajanapadadurgakośa-daṇḍamitrā-
ṇi prakṛtayaḥ (AŚ VI. 1).
PRAKṚTIKOPA--Antagonism against the King
on the part of the Prakṛtis. Here, the term
Prakṛti presumably refers to the ministers (Amā-</p>
<pb n="133" />
<p>tyas), the people of the countryside (Janapada)
and the allies (Mitra), from amongst the seven
Prakṛtis, known also as the Saptāṅga. For
the use of the term see AŚ V. 6 and IX. 3
(see also Prakṛti).
PRAKṚTI-SAṀKṢEPA--The primary elements
of the state. Shamasastry. AŚ Trans. p. 352. Rājā (the King) and Rājya
(the Kingdom) are said to be the two primary
elements of the state. Cf. rājā rājyam iti pra-
kṛtisaṁkṣepah (AŚ VIII. 2).
PRAKṚTYAMITRA—(1) One of the three varie-
ties of enemy (Amitra=Śatru=Ari).
(2) =Natural enemy. The immediate neigh-
bouring States (bhūmyyanantara) in the rear
and in the front of the Vijīgiṣu are natural
enemies (see Ari).
PRAJÑĀ GUṆAS--A King's qualities of wisdom.
Kauṭilya names them as Śuśrūṣā (desire to listen
to sāstras), Sravana (understanding of the wor-
ds), Grahana (understanding of the meanings),
Dhāraṇa (retention of what is learnt), Vijñāna
(conception of particular subjects), Uha (argu-
ment for a better understanding of any subject),
Apoha (rejection of the faulty interpretation),
Tattvābhiniveśa (absorption in the essential
meaning). (AŚ VI. 1).
PRATIKROŚA--Higher bidding in an auction.
(AŚ III. 8).
PRATIKROṢṬĀ--The higher bidder in an auction
(AŚ III. 8).</p>
<pb n="134" />
<p>PRATIBHŪ—A bail or surety or guarantee (AŚ
III. 11., Yājñavalkya II. 10, II. 54).
PRADEṢṬĀ--One of the 18 Mahāmātras or Tīrthas.
(AS' I. 12). This officer is to act as a judge
in criminal cases. (AŚ II. 35 and IV. 1 etc.)
PRABHĀVA ŚAKTI—A King's power arising out
of material wealth and political supremacy. It is
also called prabhuśakti. See Śakti.
PRABHUŚAKTI--Same as Prabhāvaśakti (q.v.)
PRAŚĀSTĀ--Nom. singular form of Praśāstṛ. The
term occurs in the list of 18 Mahāmātras or
Tīrthas. (AŚ I. 12). The term corresponding
to it in the Rāmāyaṇa list of Tīrthas is Bandhan-
āgāradhikṛta. Hence, this term is presumed to
mean an officer in charge of the jails.
PRĀKĀMYA--Authority over (or ownership of)
settle and movable properties. (AŚ III. 10).
PRĀḌVIVĀKA--(1) The chief judge and the
King's chief legal adviser. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 100 and P. 116.
(2) The term occurs in the early Smṛti works of
Gautama, Baudhayana, Āpastamba etc. Ghoshal, HIPI, p. 56.
(3) Nīlakaṇṭha, commenting on Māhabhārata,
Śānti Parva, 121.46, gives a very interesting
etymology, that, prāṭ means one who questions,
and vivāka means one who understands the atti-
tude of both the parties involved in a litigation. bhikṣukaḥ prāḍvivākaś ca mauhūrtā daivacintakāḥ.... ,pṛcchatīti prāṭ. sa cāsau vivākaśca, vivad amānayor dvayoḥ pravṛttinimittā-vettā. Cf. also Mitākṣārā on Yājñavalkya, II. 3.</p>
<pb n="135" />
<p>PRĀTIBHĀVYA--The act of becoming a bail or
surety (AŚ III. 11). Cf. asāraṁ bālaprātibhāvyam (A child's becoming the bail
will be invalid) (AŚ III. 11).
PRĀDEŚIKA—The governor of a province of the
Mauryan administration. (Asoka's Third Rock
Edict, Line 2).
PRĀPTAPAÑCAMAHĀŚABDA--(1) A title or epi-
thet applied to a royal officer of a comparatively
higher status. (Cf. Nidhanpur C.P. Grant of
Bhāskara varma, line 133. Ed. Ind. Vol. XII).
(2) =Samadhigata-pañca-mahāśabda. D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 256.
(3) The title indicates that the officer (or even
feudatory rulers) bearing this epithet were
entitled to be honoured by Pañcamahāśabda (i.e.
five kinds of musical instruments), or to
(4) The privilege of using five official titles begin-
ning with the word mahā. See, Pañcamahāśabda.
PRĀPTAVYAVAHĀRA--One who has become a
major to take part in legal suits or to claim a
division of the paternal property and for other
similar purposes. A male becomes a major after
attaining 16 years and a female becomes a major
after attaining 12 years (see AŚ III. 5 etc.).
BANDHAKA--(1) Pledge or mortgage (Yājñāvalk-
ya II. 3.37).
(2) Same as Ādhi. See Medhātithi on Manu
Saṁ. VIII. 149.</p>
<pb n="136" />
<p>BANDHANĀGĀRA--Jail.
BALI--(1) Originally the term meant only a volun-
tary tribute to gods, as we have it frequently
in the Vedic literature. (cf. Ṛgveda, V. 1. 10)
(2) Later on it came to mean a tax or impost in
the Vedic period itself. The Vaiśyas, engaged
in various productive professions and trades,
were the best tax-payers and hence they were
described as 'payer of tax to others'. A. S. Altekar SGAI, p. 262.
(3) In the Jātaka stories we have the terms
Balisādhaka and Balipātigāhakas in the sense
of tax-collectors, where the word bali means
tax in a general way.
(4) In AŚ II. 15 Kauṭilya uses the term in the
sense of an additional imposition (levied in
addition to the usual land-tax, etc.). A. S. Altekar SGAI, p. 263.
(5) Kālidāsa, in Raghuvaṁśa I. 18 uses the term
in the sense of a general tax.
(6) In Manu Saṁ. VIII. 80 the term, as inter-
preted by Medhātithi, seems to be used in the
sense of a tax in the form of one-sixth of the
produce. In this sense we generally anticipate
the term Kara. But in Manu Saṁ VIII. 307
the three terms Bali, Kara and Śulka are used
side by side. Here also Medhātithi explains Bali
as 'one-sixth of paddy etc.' (i.e. agricultural
product), Kara as 'part of other commodities
received by the King' and Śulka as 'customs
duty on merchandise'. balirdhānyādeḥ, ṣaṣṭho bhāgaḥ.
karo dravyādānam. śulkaṁ vanikprāpyabhāgah.</p>
<pb n="137" />
<p>(7) In Manu Saṁ VIII. 308, the term Bali seems
to be used explicitly in the sense of 'one-sixth'
(of the agricultural product). baliṣaḍbhāgahāriṇam.
(8) In the Junagarh Inscription of Rudradāman
I, also, we have side by side three similar terms
viz. Bali, Śulka, and Bhāga, where according to
A. S. Altekar the meanings are extra imposition,
customs and land tax respectively. yathāvatprāptai-rbaliśulkabhāgaih.
(D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 179).
A. S. Altekar, SGAI, p. 337.
But D. C. Sircar takes the terms to mean 'tax (=Kara)',
'tolls and duties' and 'King's grain share' res-
pectively. D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 179, foot note
No. 3.
(9) According to D. C. Sircar the term Bali is
often identical with Kara. But Kauṭilya
gives both the terms Bali and Kara side by side,
in AŚ II. 15.
(10) In the Rummindei Pillar Inscription of Aśoka,
we have the terms Bali and Bhāga side by
side. luṁṁini gāme ubalike kaṭe aṭhabhāgiye ca (Skt=lumbinī-
grāmaḥ udbalikaḥ kṛtaḥ aṣṭabhāgikaḥ ca). It is stated there that Aś'oka made the
village of Lumbini 'free from Bali' (udbalikaḥ)
and reduced the land-tax to only one-eighth
of the produce instead of the usual one-sixth,
(cf. āṣṭa-bhāgikaḥ). D. C. Sircar observes that
according to some scholars Bali here means. 'a
cess collected at holy places'. But it appears
to us that, as in AŚ here also Bali means 'addi-
tional imposition' since the spirit of the edict</p>
<pb n="138" />
<p>is that the birth place of the Buddha is not
only rendered free from the 'additional imposi-
tion' but also given more relief by reducing the
land tax from 16 1/3% to 12 1/2%.
(11) In the face of these divergent interpretations
it will possibly be safer to presume that the
terms Kara, Bhāga and Bali were often used
indiscriminately. That the connotation of these
names of various taxes varied from place to
place is indicated by Medhātithi also. baliprabhaṛtīni rājagrāhyakara-nāmāni deśabheda sūpamāṇa-
vakavatprasiddhāni. (Under Manu Saṁ. VIII. 307).
BĀHYAKOPA--Antagonism towards the King on
the part of any one of the Rāsṭramukhyas (pro-
minent personalities of the state or the country-
side), the Antapālas, the Āṭavikas (forest rulers)
and the Daṇḍopanatas (the vanquished rulers)
(AS' IX. 3). rāṣṭramukhyāntapālāṭavikadaṇḍopanatānā manyatamakopo
bāhyakopaḥ
BRAHMADEYĀ--(1) A free gift of land to a
brāhmaṇa. Such a land is to be free from all
types of taxes and should be enjoyable to the
successive generations of the donee. (AŚ III.1). brahmadeyānyadaṇḍ akarāṇyabhirupadāyakāni (AŚ III. 1).
(2) A woman married according to the Brahma
form of marriage. (Manu Saṁ. III. 185). Cf. S. C. Banerji, A Glossary of Smṛti Literature, p. 83.
BRAHMADEYIKĀ--An enjoyer or owner of a
Brahmadeyā (i.e. a tax-free land donated to a
brāhmaṇa). (AŚ III. 10).</p>
<pb n="139" />
<p>BHARMAṆYĀ--Maintenance cost given to
woman by her husband. (AŚ III. 3).
BHĀGA--(1) A tax in the form of a share of the
agricultural produce or any merchandise.
(2) Kauṭilya mentions it as one of the Āyamu-
khas, i.e. as a source of royal income (AŚ II. 6).
(3) This term is often suffixed to other words,
e.g. Lavaṇa bhāga (King's share of the salt
produce).
(4) A business partner's share as presumably in
AŚ II. 35.
(5) In certain places identified with Bali and in
others with Kara and in yet other places with
both. (See Bali and Kara).
(6) A subdivision of a district or a territory.
(D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphy, VIII. 5).
(7) Often used with a numerical expression to
indicate the proportion of the produce to be
realised as tax.
Cf. dhānyānām aṣṭamo bhāgaḥ ṣaṣṭho dvādaśa
eva vā (Manu Saṁ. VII. 130)..
Cf. dhānya saḍbhāgaṁ paṇya daśabhāgaṁ hiraṇ-
yaṁ cāsya bhāgadheyaṁ prakalpayāmāsuḥ (AŚ.
I. 13).
(8) = A land tax often mentioned as Bhāgakara.
BHĀGADHUK--(1)= Bhāgadugha, one of the
Ratnīs (q.v.) being the officer in charge of
revenue collection.
(2) Samāhartā of Arthaśāstra (I. 6).</p>
<pb n="140" />
<p>BHŪMICCHIDRANYĀYA—(1) =Bhumicchidra-
pidhāna-nyāya and Bhūmicchidra-vidhāna-nyāya.
(2) Literally "The maxim of the fallow land'.
Hence the term means 'the principle of the rent-
free enjoyment of land by one who brings it
under cultivation for the first time. D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 58.
(3) When a donated land was exempted from
any tax it became a convention to state the land
to have been given according to the 'maxim of
the fallow land' even where the land was not
necessarily a fallow land nor cultivated for the
first time. Cf. akincitpragṛhyatayā bhumicchidranyāyena...pratipādi.
tam (Nidhanpur C. P. Grant of Bhāskaravarman. lines 43-54.
Vide Kāmarupaś' āsanāvalī, p. 17).
BHŪMICCHIDRA VIDHĀNA--(1) Yādavapra-
kāś'ās Vaijayantī gives the meaning of bhūmi-
cchidra as a 'land unfit for cultivation'. bhumicchidraṁ kṛṣyayogyā. Kautilya begins his chapter on Bhumicchidravidhāna (AŚ II. 2) with the words: (akrsyayam
bhumau paś'ubhyo vivitāni prayacchet' (The King should make
provision for grazing grounds for the animals in the uncultivable
lands).
(2) The whole term means 'arrangement regard-
ing land unfit for cultivation'. Kauṭilya discus-
ses these arrangements in AŚ II. 2.
(3) Cf. Bhūmicchidranyāya.
BHŪMI-SANDHI--Treaty for the gain of land
(bhūmi). When in a treaty both parties agree
to stop hostility with a view to gaining some
land for both of them, it is called a Bhūmi-
sandhi.</p>
<pb n="141" />
<p>Cf. "tvaṁ cāhaṁ ca bhūmiṁ labhāvahe" iti bhū-
misandhiḥ (AŚ VII. 10).
BHṚTAKA—A servant who receives regular emo-
luments. It seems that while the Karmakara
(q.v.) belongs to a family, the Bhṛtaka maintains
his independence and works for wages, cf. the
terms grāmabhṛtaka and Bhṛtakabala.
BHṚTA-BALA--The mercenary troops. See Ṣaḍa-
ṅga bala.
BHEDA--(1) Sowing of dissensions in the enemy's
side.
(2) It is one of the four Upāyas or means of
success against the enemy.
(3) Kauṭilya describes it to be mainly of two
types, viz. Ṣaṅkājananam (creation of confusion
in the minds of the followers of the enemy), and
Nirbhartasana (intimidation of the followers of
the enemy).
Cf. śaṁkājananam nirbhartsanaṁ ca bhedaḥ
(AŚ II. 10).
BHOGAKARA--(1) The periodical supplies of
agricultural produce made to the King for his
consumption.
(2) The term occurs side by side with Bhāga.
(See Hiraṇya). Hence it is also suggested that
Bhāga-bhogakara may be a single term meaning
the King's share of agricultural produce.
BHOJA--(1) The heads of a Bhaujya (q.v.) type of
republic noticed in the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa
VIII. 14. Cf daksiṇasyāṁ diśi ye ke ca sātvatāṁ rājāno bhaujyāyaiva
tebhiṣicyante bhojetyenānabhiṣiktānācakṣata. See Jayaswal,
Hindu Polity, p. 75 ff. But Jayaswal's interpretation of the term</p>
<pb n="142" />
<p>(2) The term also occurs in the Thirteenth Rock
Edict of Aśoka (Shahbazgarhi version), line
10. Cf. 'bhoja-pitinikeṣu'...., Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 36.
(3) =Bhojaka, a term which occurs also in the
Hāthigumpha Inscription of Khāravela, line
6. Cf. sava raṭhika-bhojake pade baṁdāpayati.
D. C. Sircar takes the meaning of this term
to be "Jāgirdār". Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 220. n. 1. Altekar also takes
the meaning of Bhoja as 'feudal lord' (vide SGAI, p. 37).
BHAUJYA--(1) As explained by Jayaswal, it is a
peculiar type of government headed by a num-
ber of Kings (rājānaḥ), who after being anointed
used to be called Bhojas, as noticed in the Aita-
reya Brāhmaṇa, VIII. 14. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 75. But such a meaning is not
convincing. See note under Svārājya,
(2) Sāyaṇa, while commenting on Aitareya
Brāhmaṇa VIII. 14 ff., gives the meaning as
'enjoyment and prosperity'. A. B. Keith, in the
same contexts, renders the term as 'self-rule'. See Basu, IAB, p. 87.
(3) The king enjoying the status of Bhaujya
used to be called a Bhoja. The term Bhoja seems
to have been used to imply a higher degree of
supremacy of the king to whom it was applied
as an epithet. Cf. rājā bhojo virāṭ samrāṭ
kṣatriyo bhūpatir nṛpaḥ ya ebhiḥ stūyate śabdaiḥ
kastaṁ nārcitumarhati. (Mahābhārata, Śānti
Parva, 68. 54).
Bhaujya as a republic is not convincing (See notes under
Svārājya). Hence, the term Bhaujya should better be rendered
as 'self-rule' and Bhoja as an 'independent ruler'.</p>
<pb n="143" />
<p>MAṆḌALA--(1) A circular array of troops. (Mbh.
Bhīṣma 81. 12).
(2) It is one of the four main varieties of battle
orders (Vyūhas) the others being Daṇḍa, Bhoga
and Asaṁhata. Cf. P. C. Chakravarti: The Art of War in Ancient India,
pp. 113-115.
(3) Maṇḍala is defined by Kauṭilya to be a battle
order in which the wings (Pakṣa), flanks (Kakṣa)
and the centre (Uras) stand in close proximity
to one another without leaving any gap bet-
ween them. pakṣakaksorasyānām ekībhāve maṇḍalah (AŚ X 6)
(4) Maṇḍala- Vyūha has two sub-varieties viz.
Sarvatobhadra and Durjaya (AŚ X. 6).
(5) A district or a province. The term is often
mentioned in epigraphical records with varying
connotations. Sometimes Maṇḍala is smaller
than Viṣaya, sometimes bigger than Viṣaya
and sometimes identical with Viṣaya. D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 194 f.
(6) The circle of king's near and distant neighbours.
This circle consists of twelve kings as follows:-
There is the aggressor (Vijīgiṣu) in the centre.
In front of him there are five kings with their
territories gradually receding in distance. They
are named Ari (immediately adjacent to the
central king), Mitra (adjacent to Ari), Arimitra
(adjacent to Mitra), Mitrāmitra (adjacent to
Arimitra), and Arimitrāmitra (adjacent to</p>
<pb n="144" />
<p>mitrāmitra). Behind the central king there
are four kings with their respective territories
gradually receding from centre. These kings are
named Pārṣṇigrāha (adjacent to the central
King), Ākranda (adjacent to the Pārṣṇigrāha),
Pārṣṇigrāhāsāra (adjacent to Ākranda) and
Ākrandāsara (adjacent to the Pārṣṇigrāhāsāra).
Lying to the right or left of the central king are
two other kings viz. Madhyama (intermediate)
and Udāsīna (indifferent). These twelve kings
including the central king called a Vijīgiṣu form
the Maṇḍala (vide AŚ VI. 2).
(7) Yājñavalkya conceives the Maṇḍala in the
form of a lotus, where the circle is formed by
Ari (enemy), Mitra (ally) and Udāsīna (indiffer-
ent) remaining in gradually receding positions
in the front, in the rear, to the right and to the
left. Thus there are thirteen kings in the circle,
including the Vijīgiṣu, the central figure ( Yājña-
valkya Smṛti I. 345). Pārṣṇigrāha, Ākrandāsāra,
etc. recognised by others (e.g. Kauṭilya) may be
included in one of the several Aris, Mitras and
Udāsīnas, respectively.
MADHYAMA--One of the kings of the circle of
allied and enemy kings enumerated in the Maṇḍ-
ala theory. The territory of the Madhyama stands
either to the right or to the left of the central
figure of the circle, viz. the Aggressor (Vijīgiṣu).
4. Cf. evaṁ purataḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ pārśvatas'ca trayastraya ātmā
caika iti trayodaśarājakam idaṁ rājamaṇḍalaṁ
padmākāraṁ-pārṣṇigrāhākrandāsāradayastyari-mitrodāsīne-
ṣvevāntarbhavanti .....(Mitākaṣrā on Yājñavalkya Smṛti,
I. 345).</p>
<pb n="145" />
<p>He is an intermediate king capable of doing favour
to the Aggressor and his enemy when they are
in a treaty or even when they are involved in
a conflict or to chastise both the. Aggressor
and his enemy when they are involved in a con-
flict. Cf. arivijīgiṣorbhūmyantaraḥ saṁhatā-
saṁhatayor anugrahe samartho nigrahe cāsaṁha-
tayor madhyamaḥ (AŚ VI. 2).
MADHYAMA-SĀHASA-DAṆḌA--(1) A fine rang-
ing between two hundred and five hundred
Paṇas (AŚ III. 18). dviśatāvaraḥ pancaśatāparaḥ madhyamassāhasadaṇḍaḥ.
That the numbers here refer to the quantity of Paṇas, may be
gathered from the definition of Purvasāhasa-daṇḍa.
(2) Manu calls it Madhyama Sāhasa and fixes the
penalty at 500 Paṇas, (Manu Saṁ VIII. 138).
MANUṢYA DURGA—(1) A men fort. (vide Mbh.
Śānti 86.5).
(2) =Nṛ Durga of Manu Saṁ, VII. 70.
(3) Medhātithi explains it to be a fort full of
warriors belonging to all branches of the army.
MANTRA--(1) Counsel.
(2) Deliberation.
(3) Consultation.
(4) Secret plan on Consultation.
(5) Procedure and principles of carrying on
deliberations and of chalking out secret plans
are given in AŚ I. 15.
(6) Kauṭilya further observes that means to
carry out works, command of plenty of men and
wealth, allotment of time and place, remedies
against dangers, and final success are the five</p>
<pb n="146" />
<p>constituents of every council deliberation'
(Mantrā). Cf. AŚ Trans p. 28, and karmāṇām ārabhopāyah puruṣa-
dravyasampat, deśakālavibhāgaḥ. vinipātapratikārah. kāryasidd-
hiriti pañcāṅgo mantraḥ (AŚ I. 15). This passage of the AŚ
is quoted in Hitopadesa, Book IV.
MANTRA YUDDHA—(1) Battle of intrigue.
(2) Fighting with the enemy through the acti-
vities of the secret agents, instead of getting
engaged in an open battle.
(3) In this type of Yuddha, varieties of Gūḍha-
puruṣas are engaged to kill the enemy or to
create all sorts of dangers and difficulties for the
enemy.
(4) Details of Mantra Yuddha are given in AŚ
XII. 2.
(5) In AŚ VII. 13, Kauṭilya points out the rela-
tive superiority of the battle of intrigue (Man-
tra Yuddha) to armed confrontation (Vyāyāma
yuddha).
(6) Same as Tūṣṇīm yuddha, mentioned in AŚ
VII. 6, Verse 9, and VII. 16. Cf. prakāśa-kūṭa-tusṇiṁyuddha-durgalambho-pāyair amitra-
pragrahaṇam iti danḍam ācaret (AŚ VII. 16).
MANTRA ŚAKTI--The power of a king secured
by superior statesmanship and diplomacy and
counsel. See Śakti.
MANTRI-PARIṢAD--(1) Council of ministers.
(2) The number of the ministers constituting the
Mantripariṣad is variously given. As given in
the Arthaśāstra I. 15, according to the school of
Manu the number should be twelve; according</p>
<pb n="147" />
<p>to the school of Bṛhaspati sixteen and according
to the school of Usana twenty. mantripariṣadaṁ dvādaśāmātyān kurvīteti mānavaḥ
ṣodaśeti bārhaspatyāḥ viṁśatim ityauśanasāh. (AŚ. I. 45).
(3) Manu in Manu Saṁ. VII. 54, however,
gives the number as seven or at best eight, using
the term Saciva for Mantrī. Sacivān sapta cāṣṭau vā kurvita suparikṣitān (MS. VII. 54).
(4) In Manusaṁhitā VII. 60/61, Manu suggests
that the number of ministers may be more than
seven or eight, and there should be as many
Amātyas as necessary for smoothly carrying on
the royal business. Medhātithi points out that
Manu Saṁ. VII. 60, where it is advised to
appoint more ministers is an exception (Apavā-
da) to the rule of appointing seven or eight as
stated in Manu Saṁ. VII. 54. yaduktam 'sapta cāṣṭau veti' tasyāyam apavādah (Medhā-
tithi under MS. VII. 60).
(5) Kautilya's own opinion, given after referring
to the views of Manu, Bṛhaspati and Uś'anas,
is that the actual number of ministers should
depend upon the needs of the situation in the
state. "Yathāsāmarthyam" iti Kauṭilyah (AŚ I. 15).
(6) While the scope of the Mantripariṣad re-
mains flexible, Kauṭilya takes care to suggest
that in actual practice the king should take
counsel from only three or at best four Mantrīs. The term Mantripariṣad is clearly used by Kauṭilya (See under No. 1 above). In the term Mantripariṣad, the word
Mantri, seems to mean executive heads. mantribhistribhiścaturbhirvā saha mantrayeta (AŚ I. 15)
Here the term Mantri seems to mean Counsellors. See under
Ātyayika karma.</p>
<pb n="148" />
<p>(7) In the third and sixth Rock Edicts of
As'oka we find the Prakrit term Parisā (Skt.
Pariṣad) in the sense of Mantri-Pariṣad. Parisāpi yute āñapayisati (Third Rock Edict, line 6)
Parisāyaṁ=pariṣadi (Sixth Rock Edict, line 7) (Vide D. C.
Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, pp. 19 and 24).
(8) There seems usually to have been a chief
counsellor, the Mantrin par excellence, often
called "great counsellor" (māhamantrin). A. L. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 99.
MANTRI-PARIṢAD-ADHYAKṢA--The president
of the council of ministers. He is one of the 18
Mahāmātras (q.v.)
MANTRĪ—(1) A minister.
(2) Strictly speaking a counsellor of the king in
policy matters.
(3) Amarakośa equates Mantrī to a Dhīsaciva
(a minister for counsel) as opposed to a Karma-
saciva (a minister for action or execution). mantrī dhīsacivo'mātyo'nye karmasacivā-stataḥ (Amarakośa--
Kṣatriyavarga).
(4) Mantrī=Dhīsaciva=Matisaciva.
(5) The terms Mantrī, Saciva and Amātya are
often indiscriminately used.
(6) Rāmāyaṇa 1-7-3 refers to Sumantra as an
Amātya, 1-7-4/5 name 7 others as Mantrī, while
1-8-4 refers to Sumantra again as a Mantrī.
(7) Manusaṁhitā (VIII-54), while suggesting
that the council of ministers should have 7 or 8
members uses the term Saciva in the sense of
Mantrī.</p>
<pb n="149" />
<p>(8) Mahābhārata suggesting the number to be 8
uses the term Mantrī. aṣṭānāṁ mantriṇāṁ madhye mantrāṇi rājopadhārayet (Mbh.
XII. 85).
(9) Śukranītisāra distinguishes between the
terms Saciva, Mantrī and Amātya as follows --
sarvadarśī pradhānastu senāvit sacivastathā Man-
trī tu nītikuśalaḥ paṇḍito dharmatattvavit deśa-
kālapravijñātā hyamātya iti kathyate (ŚNS II.84-
86).
(10) At least in one place Kauṭilya seems to
use the term Mantrī in the sense of an executive
officer. Because, he suggests that in an emer-
gent situation the king should immediately call
the Mantrīs or Mantripariṣad (See quotation
from AŚ I. 15 under Ātyayika Kārya). In the
passage referred to, Kauṭilya seems to use the
term Mantriṇaḥ in the sense of Counsellors
(Matisacivas) and the term Mantrīpariṣad in
the sense of 'a council of executive officers."
MAHATTARĀDAHIKĀRINS--(1) Adhikārima-
hattaras.
(2) Village elders in office or power, belonging
to south India from C. 600 A.D. onwards. Altekar, SGAI, p. 230.
MAHĀKṢA PAṬALIKA--(1) Superintendent of
legal records. Cf. Altekar, SGAI, p. 199. (See Akṣapaṭala).
(2) =Akṣapaṭalika.
(3) =Akṣapaṭalādhyakṣa (q.v.).
MAHĀMANTRĪ—(1) The king's chief counsellor.
(2) The Mantrī par excellence.
MAHĀMĀTRA--(1) =Mahāmātya.</p>
<pb n="150" />
<p>(2) =Pkt. Mahāmata.
(3) Often referred to in plural as in Aśoka's
second separate Jaugada Rock Edict, line 1
(....mahāmata), meaning top ranking Exe-
cutive Officers. The Mahāmātras mentioned
in the separate Rock Edicts of Dhauli and
Jaugada are supposed to have formed a Council
of Governors to carry on the administration of
Kalinga. K. P. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 284.
(4) The term often forms the latter part of a
larger technical term meaning top ranking offi-
cials looking after special branches of adminis-
tration, e.g., Dharma Mahāmātra (=Dhamma-
Mahāmata) in the seventh Pillar Edict (Delhi-
Topra) of Aśoka and Sramana-Mahāmātra
(=Samana Mahamata) in the Nasik Cave Ins-
cription of the time of Krishna. D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 63. D. C. Sircar, Ibid., pp. 189 f.
(5) A member of the group of 18 Tīrthas or 18
Mahāmātras (See under TĪRTHA).
(6) According to Amarakośa, Mahāmātra is the
Mahāmantrī, i.e. Chief Minister. mahāmātraḥ pradhānāni (Amara. Kṣatriya varga).
(7) Manu Saṁhitā, IX-259 mentions the term
Mahāmātra, where Medhātithi understands the
term to mean Mantrī, Purohita, etc. (mantrī-
purohitādayaḥ).
(8) Apte quotes an old verse according to which
the Mahāmātra is called so because of having
political wisdom, deeds, ornaments, wealth,</p>
<pb n="151" />
<p>honour and dress in higher (mahatī) degree
(mātrā) or measure. mantre karmaṇi bhuṣāyāṁ vitte māne paricchade mātrā ca
mahatī yeṣāṁ mahāmātrāstu te smṛtāḥ.
(9) According to Śukra each minister had two
junior ministers attached to his particular
department. ekasminnadhikāre tu puruṣaṇāṁ trayaṁ sadā niyuñjīta
prājñatamaṁ mukhayam ekaṁ tu teṣu vai (Śukranitisāra II 109).
The chief of these three was distinguished by
the title Mahāmātra. K. P. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 305.
MAHIṢĪ--(1) The queen.
(2) The chief queen.
(3) One of the eleven Ratnins (q.v.).
MAHĪDURGA--(1) An earth fort (vide Mbh. Śānti
86.5 and Manu Saṁ. VII. 70).
(2) Medhātithi describes it to be a fort surroun-
ded on all sides by deep waters.
MĀTSYANYĀYA--(1) The maxim of the strong
fishes destroying the weak ones in the open sea.
In analogy with it, the term in the context
of politics means "a state of anarchy". See Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 82 n. In the
absence of a king there occurs a state of anarchy
(Mātsyanyāya) where the strong men destroy
the weak ones with impunity. See AŚ I. 4 for
the use of the term and explanation. apraṇīto hi mātsyanyāyam udbhāvayanti valfyān abalaṁhi grasate daṇḍadharābhāve.</p>
<pb n="152" />
<p>(2) The term is used in the same sense also in
the Rāmāyāṇa and the Mahābhārata. Cf. arājakāḥ prajāḥ sarvā purvaṁ vineśuriti nahśrutam
parasparaṁ bhaksayanto matsyā iva jale kṛṣān (Mahābhārata,
Sānti Parva, 67.17).
nārājake janapade svakaṁ bhavati kasyacit matsyā iva janā
nityaṁ bhakṣayanti parasparam (Rāmāyaṇa, Ayodhya Kāṇḍa,
67-31).
(3) Manu Saṁhitā VII. 20 contains the idea of
a Mātsyanyāya occurring in the absence of
Daṇḍa (i.e. king's coercive authority). See Kulluka's commentary on Manu Saṁ. VII. 20 for a reference to the term.
(4) Kāmandaka explains it as mutual antago-
nism of the people of various avocations due
to the absence of Daṇḍa. parasparāmiṣatayā jagato bhinnavartamanaḥ daṇḍābhāve
paridhvaṁsi mātsyo nyāyaḥ pravartate (Kāmandakiya Nītisāra,
II. 40).
(5) Col. G.A. Jacob includes it as one of the
popular maxims (Nyāya's) in the Laukikanyā-
yāñjali, Pt. II. (pp. 57 f.)
(6) The idea that the Mātsyanyāya occurs pri-
marily in the open sea is contained in the Ni-
dhanpur C.P. Grant of Bhāskaravarman, verse
8. mātsyanyāyāvirahitaḥ prakāśa-ratnaḥ suto dvairathalaghuḥ
pañrama iva hi samudraḥ samudravarmāabhavat-tasya (Kāma-
rūpaśàsanāvali, p. 12).
Compare also Khalimpur Plate of Dharmapāla Deva, Verse
(Rajbali Pandey, Historical and Literary Inscriptions, p. 225).
MĀNĀDHYAKṢA--The Controller of the measu-
rement of area and time (AŚ II. 20).
MĀHĀRĀJYA--The term occurs in several pray-
ers and oaths of the vedic literature. For</p>
<pb n="153" />
<p>example, in Aitareya Brāhmaṇa 8-37-5 as ren-
dered by A. B. Keith the term means a para-
mount rule. A. B. Keith, The Ṛgveda-Brāhmaṇas the Atharvaveda
(Harvard Oriental Series, XXV).
MITRA--(1) An ally.
(2) In the context of the Maṇḍala-theory
there are two distinct types of allies.
(3) If a king belonging to an alternate territory
and bearing a kinship with the Vijīgi u, behav-
es as an ally by nature, he is called a Sahaja-
mitra. Cf. bhūmyekāntaraṁ prakrtimitraṁ mātā-pitṛisambandhaṁ
sahajam (AS' VI. 2).
(4) If an ally comes to take shelter with the
Vijīgi u for the safety of his own wealth and
life, he is called a Kṛtrima mitra. Cf. dhanajīvitahetorāśritaṁ kṛtrimamiti (AŚ V.I. 2), From the English translation of Shamasastri and also the Bengali
translation of R. G. Basak, Kauțilya appears to recognise only
two varieties of Mitra, viz. Sahaja Mitra (natural friend) and
Kṛtrima Mitra (acquired friend) But according to the Jayamaṅ-
galā Com on Kāmandakīyanītīsara, IV. 71, Kauṭilya recognises
three varieties, viz. Sahaja-, Pṛakṛta- and Kṛtrima Mitra. As
understood by Jayamangalā, one belonging to an alternate terri-
tory (bhumyekāntaram) is the Prākṛta-while one bearing a
kinship (mātāpitṛsambandham) is the Sahajamitra,
(5) Kāmandakīyanītisāra (IV.71) recognises four
varieties of Mitra, and they are-a friend by
birth, one acquired through connection, one
who is a friend on account of the situation of
the territory, and one saved from calamity.
Cf. aurasaṁ maitrasambaddhaṁ tathā deśakramā-</p>
<pb n="154" />
<p>gatam rakṣitaṁ vyasanebhyaśca mitraṁ jñeyaṁ
caturvidham. In the Hitopadeśa the first half is slightly differently read
as follows:--
aurasaṁ kṛtasambandhaṁ tathā vaṁśakramāgatam.
Accordingly we have a friend by birth, one acquired through
connections (other than parental connection) and one descended
from the same genealogical stock, while one saved from calamity
is the fourth variety as given in the second half. (Vide Hitopa-
deśa, I, 93).
MITRA PRAKṚTI--The allied king whose terri-
tory stands separated from the territory of a
Vījigiṣu (i.e. the Aggressor, the central figure
in the Maṇḍala theory) by the territory of an-
other king, who is usually an enemy.
Cf. tathaiva bhumyekāntarā mitraprakṛtiḥ (AŚ
VI. 2).
MITRA-BALA--Soldiers derived from anally in
time of an aggression.
MITRA-MITRA--An ally in the circle of the
allies and enemies as conceived in the Maṇḍala
theory. His territory stands fifth from that of
the Vījigiṣu being immediately beyond the
territory of the Arimitra.
MITRA-SANDHI--"Treaty for the acquisition
of an ally". U. N. Ghoshal, HIPI, p. 98, When in a treaty both the parties
stop hostility and come to an agreement, aiming
at the gain of an ally for both of them, the trea-
ty is called Mitra-Sandhi (AŚ VII. 9).
MITRA SAMPAT--The ideal and desirable quali-
ties of an ally which put him to the best advan-
tage of the Vījigiṣu (AŚ VI. 1).</p>
<pb n="155" />
<p>MUDṚĀDHYAKṢA—The Superintendent of Pass-
ports (AS II. 34).
MṚD-DURGA--Earth fort (Vide Mbh. Śānti,
MOKṢA--Legal separation of a couple, cf. Paras.
paraṁ dveṣān mokṣaḥ (AŚ III. 3).
MAULA BALA--The hereditary troops. See Ṣāḍ-
aṅga-bala.
YĀTAVYA--One of the four varieties of an ene-
my, the other three varieties being Ucchedanīya,
Pīḍanīya and Karśanīya. The present term
implies an enemy, fit to be attacked. It is
advised that an enemy who is found to be en-
grossed in the Vyasanas is to be reckoned as
Yātavya. Cf. vyasanī yātavyaḥ. (AŚ VI. 2).
YĀNA--(1) Military expedition against the hostile
King.
(2) It is one of the six modes of foreign policy.
(see Sādguṇya).
(3) Kauṭilya maintains that such an expedition
is made only when there is a concurrence of
excessive power, proper time and proper place.
Cf. abhyuccayo yānam (AŚ VII. 1).
YUKTA--(1) =Pkt. YUTA, as in the Third Book
Edict of Aśoka, where it means Administrators
of smaller districts or smaller divisions of the
State. D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, Vol. I, p. 19.</p>
<pb n="156" />
<p>(2) But there also the term may mean "an
officer in general". D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 386.
(3) In AŚ II. 8 Kauṭilya seems to use the term in
the sense of authorised and responsible officials.
(4) The Yukta of AŚ II.8 seems to be immediately
responsible to the higher official as Upa-yukta,
mentioned in AŚ II.
(5) In the sense of an officer in general the term
is often found to be equivalent to the terms,
Yuktaka, Āyukta and Āyuktaka. Ibid., p. 387,
YUKTAKA--See YUKTA.
YUVARĀJA—A crown prince. He is one of the 18
Mahāmātras or Tīrthas (q.v.). Sometimes a Yu-
varāja also is required to act as the head of the
state. In that case the type of government is
called Yauvarājya (q.v.). Cf. yuvarāje vā
krameṇa rājyabhāram āropya rājavyasanam,
(AŚ V. 6). Here the chief minister is advised
to make public the report of the demise of a
king only after gradually transferring the regal
responsibilities to the Yuvarāja.
YOGA--(1) All the foul means applied in politics
like the activities of the spies. (AŚ IX. 1).
(2) Application of drugs, herbs and illusions
(Māyā) etc. for the killing of enemy. Cf.
mantra-bhaiṣajyasaṁyuktā yoga-maya-kṛtāśca ye
upahanyadamitrāṁsstaissvajanaṁ cābhipālayat
(AŚ XIV. 3).
YOGA-KṢEMA--(1) Preservation of the old and
acquisition of the new (not previously acquired).</p>
<pb n="157" />
<p>Cf. Yājñavalkya 1.100 and Mitākṣarā thereon. alabdhalābho yogah labdhaparipālanaṁ kṣemaḥ (Mitākṣarā on Yājñavalkya, I. 100).
For the use of this term in this sense vide AŚ
I.4, Mahābhārata, Śānti, 348, 72, and Gītā,
IX. 22. Cf. "ānvīkṣikī-trayī-vārtānāṁ yogakṣemasādhano daṇḍaḥ".
R. Shama Sastry translates it as follows:
"That sceptre on which the well-being and progress of the
sciences of Ānvīkṣikī, the triple Vedas and Vārtā depend is
known as Daṇḍa". 'Well-being and progress' as the meaning of
yoga-kṣema seems to be quite reasonable. The explanation of
the term given by Mitākṣarā seems to be based on what is given
in the AŚ immediately after the above extract: Cf. "tasya
nītir daṇḍanītīḥ, alabdhālabhārthā. labdhaparirakṣanī, rakṣitavivar-
dhanī vṛddhasya tīrtheṣu pratipādani ca". All these four aspects
may together be conveyed by the expression 'protection and
prosperity' or 'security and prosperity'. The word prosperity
may imply both gain and growth of a wealth. The last foot of this verse of Gītā (i.e., yogakṣemaṁ vahāmya-
ham) is adopted as the motto in the emblem of the Life Insur-
ance Corpn. of India.
(2) In the context of Politics, it means the 'pro-
tection and prosperity' of a state, cf. Bhoja's
Campū Rāmāyaṇa I.17 (api dhiṣaṇamanīṣānir-
mitā nītimārgā-stridasanagara-yoga-kṣema-kṛtye
kṣamante). In general it also means the security
and prosperity of the people as a whole. Cf.
vinayamūlo daṇḍaḥ prāṇabhṛtāṁ yogakṣemāva-
haḥ. R. Shamasastry's rendering of prāṇabhṛtaṁ yogakṣemāvahaḥ
as 'which alone can procure safety and security of life' is not
happy, as safety and security mean almost the same thing :
Again we have this very rendering under Kauṭilya's, tena bhṛtā
rājānaḥ prajānāṁ yogakṣemāvahāḥ (AŚ I. 13).
Translating this passage of Kauṭilya, Jayaswal renders the term
as government and well-being', (Hindu Polity, p. 166). Ren-
dering of the word yoga as 'government' seems to be far-fetched.
(AŚ I. 5).</p>
<pb n="158" />
<p>(3) This term was in use even in the days of the
Ṛgveda in the sense of prosperity and well
being.
Cf. yogakṣemaṁ va ādāyā'haṁ bhūyāsam, etc.
(Ṛgveda, X. 166.5).
YOGAPURUṢA--A type of secretly engaged agents
for supporting some action of the administration
from among the public as innocent citizens
(vide AŚ. V.6).
YOGAPRAYOGA--Engagement of secret agents
like a Tīkṣṇa (q.v.) for harming the enemy.
YAUVARĀJYA--(1) A State ruled by the Yuvarāja
(i.e., the Crown Prince).
(2) Such a Yauvarājya is mentioned in the Jaina
Ācārāṅgasūtra quoted under Gaṇarājya (q.v.).
(3) The term seems to refer to a government
like the one over which Khāravela presided for
nine years up to his coronation at the age of
twenty-four. Cf. "nava vasāni yovaraja (pa) sāsitaṁ", Hāthigumphā
Cave Inscription of Khāravela, line 2 (vide D.C. Sircar, Select
Inscriptions, p. 214).
RAJJUKA--(Pkt-Rājūka and Lājūka. Aśoka's Third Rock Edict. Girnar Version. Line 2. Aśoka's Fourth Pillar Edict. Delhi-Topra version. Line 2.).
(1) A district officer under the Mauryan admin-
istration, who was responsible for the civil ad-
ministration of a district. In Aśoka's Rock
Edict IV, the Rajjukas are advised in great
detail to be kind and judicious to the people</p>
<pb n="159" />
<p>and to look after their welfare. From the same
Edict, asking them to follow a uniform policy in
punishment, we learn that the Rajjukas had
judicial powers as well. Cf. viyohāla-samatā ca siya daṇḍa--samata ca (Ibid.--
Line 15). The word rajju means
a rope and hence these officers presumably were
responsible also for revenue settlement and re-
venue assessment etc. See Altekar, SGAI, pp. 213 f. But the word rajju may
not be the land-measuring rope and may be the
rope for binding a thief or such criminal and
hence the term may mean something like a
police officer. Cf. the term Daṇḍapāśika.
RATNA--HAVIS--A Vedic ritual forming part of
the coronation ceremony and more precisely
of the Rājasūya sacrifice. 'In this ceremony
the King-designate goes to the house of each of
the Ratnins (q.v.) and offers an oblation at his
(or her) place in honour of a particular deity. J, R. Basu, IAB, p. 108.
This is also an act of honour to the Ratnins who
are recognised as King-makers Rājakṛtaḥ. The
details of this ceremony are given in the Śata-
patha Brāhmaṇa, 5-3-1.
RATHAKĀRA--(1) One of the Ratnins (q.v.)
named in the Maitrāyaṇī Saṁhitā (i.e., the Mai-
trāyaṇī edn. of Yajurveda).
(2) The plain meaning of the term is 'chariot-
builder'. In order to have special recognition
from the King-elect in time of his consecration
as a Ratnin, this Rathakāra must have been
the chief of the chariot makers, holding a high
degree of technological proficiency.</p>
<pb n="160" />
<p>RATHA-VYŪHA—A battle-order formed with
chariots (AŚ X.5).
RATHĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of royal
chariots. This officer was needed to supervise
the making of the various kinds of rathas (cha-
riots) and to take care of the horses attached
to the chariots, in the manner of the Aśvā-
dhyakṣa.
RATNIN(S)--(1) Singular form in Sanskrit is Ratnī.
(2) =The court dignitaries. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 42 and p. 560,
(3) These court dignitaries or literally "jewel
bearers", formed the King's council of high
functionaries in the later Vedic period of Indian
history.
(4) of the ancient texts the Śatapatha Brāhma-
ṇa, the Taittirīya Saṁhitā (1.8.9.1 etc.) and the
Taittirīya Brāhmaṇa (I.7.3.1 etc.) give us
slightly varying lists of these Ratnins, and their
number is eleven.
(5) The council of Ratnins comprised of the
King's very near relatives, courtiers and certain
palace officials, who were looked on as so im-
portant that at the King's consecration (Abhiṣe-
ka) the King elect had to offer oblations (called
Ratnahavis) in the place of each one of the
Ratnins to ensure their loyalty. In connection
with this ritual of offering Ratna-havis the
scriptures give the names of the Ratnins as
follows :
Senāni (the commander-in-chief), Purohita (the
royal chaplain), Mahiṣī (the chief queen), Sūta</p>
<pb n="161" />
<p>(the court minstrel and chronicler), Grāmaṇī
(the most prominent among the village headmen),
Kṣattā (the royal Chamberlain), Saṁgrahitā
(the treasurer), Bhāgadugha (the collector of
revenue), Akṣāvāpa (officer in charge of the
royal records and State Account), Govikarta
(officer in charge of the royal herd of cattle) Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 194. Altekar (SGAI, p. 162) suggests that the Sūta was probably the commander of the
chariot corps of the royal army, who might have also acted as
the honorary charioteer to the King. The meaning 'food distributor' given by U. N. Ghoshal (History of the Hindu Public Life, I. p. 109) is doubtful. Vide
Altekar, SGAI, p. 162, n. 1). The term Saṁgrahitā corresponds to the term Sannidhātā (q.v.) given by Kauṭilya in AŚ II.5 and the term Bhāgadugha
corresponds to the term Samāhartā (q.v.) given by Kauṭilya in
AŚ II. 6.
Altekar (SGAI, p. 162) gives the meaning as "the King's
companion at the game table". Commentators of the Vedic
texts have explained the term as "the controller of gambling".
But Jayaswal (Hindu Polity, p. 195) gives the meaning as
"officer in charge of State Accounts", in the light of the terms
Akṣapaṭalā, given in AŚ II. 7. We have also preferred to give
the present meaning, taking the term Akṣāvāpa to be analogous
to the term Akṣapaṭalādhyakṣa given by Kauṭilya (AŚ II. 7).
It is deemed reasonable to presume that when the seventh and
the eighth terms of the list of Ratnins correspond to the terms
given in the 5th and 6th chapters of Book II of the AŚ respective-
ly, the ninth term should correspond to a term given in the
seventh chapter of AŚ II.
This meaning is given after Altekar (SGAI, p. 102). Jayas-
wal (Hindu Polity, p. 196) gives the meaning as the 'master
of forests' and takes him to have been in charge also of the hunts-
men in the light of McCrindle's Megasthenes, p. 86. Macdonell
and Keith give the meaning as either 'slayer of cows' or 'hunts-
man.' (Vedic Index. Vol. II, p. 199).</p>
<pb n="162" />
<p>and Palāgala (the royal courier). This meaning is given by Jayaswal (loc. cit.) Altekar sug-
gests that Palāgala was probably the King's bosom companion,
corresponding to the Viduṣaka of the later period.
(6) The last two are not mentioned in the Taitti-
rīya Brāhmaṇa. The Maitrāyaṇī Saṁhitā (i.e.,
the Maitrāyaṇī edition of the Yajurveda) does
not give the name of Palāgala, but instead gives
the names of Takṣā (the royal carpenter) and
Rathakāra (the royal chariot maker). The Kāthakasaṁhitā gives Govyaca for Govikarta and omits
Takṣā and Rathakāra. For details see also Vedic Index. Vol.
II, pp. 199 f. Thus
the Ratnins seem to have formed a very im-
portant council of ministers and executive offi-
cers in the later Vedic age.
RĀJA-DHARMA--(1) Literally "Law for the
Rulers". As such the term means "The science
of Politics" and it is same as Daṇḍanīti (q.v.).
(2) In the Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva, there is a
long discourse on the nature, utility and indis-
pensability of Rājadharma. U.N. Ghoshal, with
reference to that discourse, renders the term as
the "whole Duty of the King". U. N. Ghoshal, HIPI, pp. 189 f. But in course
of that discourse too Māhabhārata uses the
term Daṇḍanīti also. Ibid., p. 190.
Cf. majjet trayī daṇḍanītau hatāyāṁ sarve dharmāḥ prakṣa-
yeyur vibuddhāḥ sarve dharmāścāśramāṇāṁ hatah syuḥ kṣatre
tyakte rājadhar ma puṛāṇe (Mahābhārata, Sānti Parva, 63.28).
(3) According to a Buddhist tradition, as record-
ed in certain Jātaka stories, this term implies
ten specific royal duties. Those who ruled in</p>
<pb n="163" />
<p>righteousness, used to practise the ten royal
duties, known by this term, and the names of
some of them are given as alms-giving, morality,
liberality, straight-forwardness, refraining from
anger and from injury, forbearance and refrain-
ing from opposition. U. N. Ghoshal, Ibid., p. 69.
RĀJANĪTI—(1) Also called Nīti or Rājavidyā.
(2) The science of Statecraft.
(3) Pandey suggests that Rajaniti is an aspect
not of Dharmaśāstra, but of Arthaśāstra. K. C. Pandey, "Rājaniti or Politics", Indian Antiquary, 1964, I. 2. p. 102. Un-
like Rājadharma, Rājanīti concerns mainly
with the acquisitions of material prosperity and
their security and safety from outside aggression.
RĀJA-NĪTI-ŚASTRA--The sciences of politics.
(See Rājanīti).
RĀJA ŚĀSTRA--The science of politics. Same as
Daṇḍanīti (q.v.).
RĀJASŪYA--A ritual performed for the consecra-
tion of a King. Cf.
rājña eva rājasūyam, rājā vai rājasūyeneṣṭva
bhavati.... "The Rājasūya verily belongs to
the King. One indeed becomes a King by
performing the Rājasūya sacrifice". (Śata-
patha Brāhmaṇa. V.11.12).
RĀJĀ--(Nom. singular of the word Rājan).
(1) The original form of this word, literally mean-
ning a ruler, was Rat, and it is connected with
Latin rex. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 183; Basham, The Wonder
that was India, p. 33.</p>
<pb n="164" />
<p>(2) According to a traditional etymological de-
rivation, presented by the traditional theory
of the origin of Kingship, the Rājā is the chosen
leader of the people (Mahāsammata), 'who gra-
tifies (rañjayati) the others according to Dham-
ma'. Cf. dammena pare rañjetīti kho vāseṭṭha rājā. (Dīgha-Nik-
āya, Aggañña Suttanta, III.
See Jayaswal, Ibid., p. 183 and Basham, The Wonder that
was India, p. 82).
(3) Kālidāsa also follows this derivation of the
word Rājā from the root rañj and observes that
such and such Kings are appropriately called
a Rājā, because of pleasing the people. Cf. tathaiva so'bhudanvartho rājā prakṛtirañjanāt. (Raghu-
vaṁśa, 4.12), rājā prajārañjana-labdhavarṇaḥ (Ibid., 6.21),
and prakṛtimaṇḍalam anurañjayan rājyaṁ karoti. (Vikramorva-
śīyam). King Khāravela of Orissa (c. 170 B.C.) says that he
had pleased his thirty-five hundred thousand subjects, with a
very similar expression cf. panasisahi satasahasehi pakatiyo ca
rañjayati (Hāthigumphā Inscription of Khāravela, Line 4).
(4) The term meant a vassal king or even a
smaller vassal king in relation to the paramount
rulers assuming the titles like mahārāja, rājā-
tirāja, and mahārājādhirāja, as was the vogue
from Gupta times onwards. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 84.
(5) The term applied to all the Heads of the
families capable of taking part in the tribal as-
semblies constituting the government of the non-
monarchical Republics or Saṁgha-states. 'Ac-
cording to a rather dubious Buddhist tradition
the Licchavis had no less than 7707' such Rājās. Basham, Ibid., p. 96.</p>
<pb n="165" />
<p>Kauṭilya also informs us about seven Saṁgha
states, including the Republic of Liccha vis, where
every privileged member of the governing as-
sembly had the practice of assuming the title
Rājā. Cf. licchivika-vṛjika-mallaka-madraka-kukura-kuru-pāñcālā-
dayo rājaśabdopajīvinaḥ (AŚ XI. 1).
See Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 31, for the interpretation
of the expression rājaśabdopajīvinah. According to Basham
(Ibid., p. 97), it is an ironical observation of Kauṭilya, that the
members of the said Republic used to "make a living by their
title of rājā".
(6) The term has been used in Northern India
(Āryāvarta) to mean any one engaged in the
ruling function (vide Kumārila on Mīmāṁsāsūtrā,
II. 3.2).
(7) The term used to be applied even to governors
of districts (Māṇḍalikas), appointed to their
posts by some paramount rulers (vide Kumā-
rila in the same context of the Mīmāṁsāsūtra).</p>
<p>(8) The people of Andhra (as recorded by Śabara)</p>
<p>and the people of Draviḍa (as recorded by Ku-
mārila) "applied the title to all Kṣhatriyas ir-
respective of their exercise of the ruling function
or not". U. N. Ghoshal, A History of Indian Political Ideas,
pp. 323 f.
RĀJĀYATTĀ SIDDHI--Administration con-
ducted by (literally dependent on) the King
(without taking the minister fully into confi-
dence). Prof. Dhruva in his translation of
Mudrārākṣasa calls it an autocratic adminis-
tration (vide p. 214). See also Siddhi.</p>
<pb n="166" />
<p>RĀJYA--(1) The term occurs in several prayers and
oaths of the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa. Commenting
on AB. 8-37-5, Sāyaṇa gives the meaning of
this term as 'lordship of a country', and A. B.
Keith renders the term as Kingship. J. R. Basu, IAB, p. 87.
(2) In the Arthaśāstra and also in the classical
literature the term means the Kingdom. Shamasastry renders the chapter heading rājyapratisan-
dhānam (AŚ V.6) as 'consolidation of the Kingdom'. Cf.
rājyakāraṇāddhi pitā putrān putrāśca pitaram abhi druhyanti
(AŚ V.6). 'On account of the Kingdom the father hates his
sons, and sons their father'. (AŚ. Trans. p. 284).
RĀJYAVIBHRAMA--A political upheaval in the
state (AŚ III.16).
RĀṢTRA--(1) A territorial state as against the
notion of a state of tribal nature. Cf. Atharvaveda, XX. 127.9-10, XIX. 30.3-4, etc. and
Taittirīya Saṁhitā, II. 3.3-4. Vide Altekar, SGAI, p. 30 f.
(2) The State as a whole. (cf. Manu Saṁ. VII.
9-10).
(3) The citizens of a state as a whole (cf. Manu
Saṁ, IX.254).
(4) The second of the five Prakṛtis recognised
by Manu in connection with his Maṇḍala-
theory. (vide Manu Saṁ. VIII.157).
(5) During the period between 600 B.C. and
600 A.C. the term used to be a synonym of
Janapada and Deśa, in the sense of that part
of the country which falls outside the capital. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 230.
(6) Amara gives it as a synonym of Deśa.</p>
<pb n="167" />
<p>(7) Some thirteen sources of royal income, viz.
Sītādhyakṣa, Bhāga, Vali, etc. enumerated in
AŚ II.6 are together known as Rāṣṭra.
(8) Another ten sources of royal income, viz.
Piṇḍakara, Ṣaḍbhāga, etc. enumerated in AŚ
II.15 are together known as Rāṣṭra.
RĀṢTRĀNTAPĀLA--See under Antapāla-durga.
RĀṢTRIKA--(Pkt. Rathika and Raṭṭhika). The
governor of a district or a sub-division. D. C. Sircar, Glossary, p. 278. From
Asoka's Minor Rock Edict: Yerragudi Version,
lines 14 ff, it appears that the Rāṣṭrika was
directly responsible to a Rajjuka. D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 51.
RIKTHA--(1) Property left by the deceased
father as inheritance (AŚ III.5).
(2) Inheritance in general, since the words like
pitryam and paitrikam often precede this term.
Cf. nanu garbhaḥ pitryaṁ riktham arhati (Śakun-
talā VI);
cf. also, bhajeran paitrikaṁ riktham (Manu Saṁ.
IX. 104).
(3) A property in general.
Cf. Manu Saṁ. VIII. 30. (praṇaṣṭasvāmikaṁ
riktham).
(4)=Ṛktha.
RŪPA--(1) An additional surcharge of 8% on
all fines. (AŚ III.18).
(2) Stolen goods (AŚ IV.6).
RŪPIKĀ—(1) An 8% tax to be paid in time of
getting coins minted in the royal mint by any</p>
<pb n="168" />
<p>one for personal use with metals supplied by
himself (AŚ II. 12).
(2) Eight per cent of the salt collected as a levy
by the Lavaṇādhyakṣa from the salt sellers.
(AŚ II. 6).
LABDHA-PRAŚAMANA--Establishment of peace
in a newly conquered state (AŚ XIII. 5).
LOBHAVIJAYĪ--(1) One of the three kinds of
conquerors, the other two being Dharmavijayī
and Asuravijayī. (AŚ XII.1).
(2) This type of conqueror becomes satisfied
only by grabbing the land and wealth of the
defeated King. bhumidravyāharaneṇa lobhavijayī tuṣyati (AŚ XII. 1).
VANADURGA--(1) Forest Fort (vide AŚ II. 3).
(2) =Vṛkṣa-Durga of Viṣṇu Saṁhitā, III.6
and Vārkṣa-Durga of MS, VII.70.
(3) Vana-Durga is mentioned also by Mbh.
Śānti, 86.5.
VĀKPARUṢYA--(1) One of the eight Krodhaja-
vyasanas (Manu Saṁ. VII.48). Or one of the three Kopaja Vyasanas recognised by Kau-
ṭilya. AŚ VIII. 3.
(2) Kauṭilya enumerates three varieties of it,
viz, Upavada (reference to one's physical de-
formities by way of abusing), Kutsana (censur-
ing some one by calling him a lunatic or by</p>
<pb n="169" />
<p>using any such word of censure) and Abhibharts-
ana (use of severe language by way of showing
fear of murder, etc.) (AŚ III. 18).
VĀJAPEYA--A preliminary rite performed by a
King prior to his consecration. Macdonell and Keith, Vedic Index, Vol. II, p. 281. This rite was supposed to give the King fresh vital strength
and to raise him from the status of a simple
Rājā to that of a Samrāṭ. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 42.
The details of the ritual are given in the Śatapatha Brāhmaṇa.
VĀRTĀ--(1) The science of Economics dealing
with Agriculture, Animal-Husbandry and
Commerce together. Cf. Manu Saṁ, VII. 43, Yājñavalkya, I.311, etc. Kṛṣipaśupālye vaṇijyā ca vārtā (AŚ Į.4).
(2) One of the four basic sciences (Vidyās) (Vide
AŚ 1.1).
(3) It has been recognised as the only avocation
of the Vaiśyas, cf. Vārtākarmaiva vaiśyasya
(Manu Saṁ. X.80). In Manu Saṁ, IX. 326,
however, cattle-rearing seems to be recognised
as lying outside the scope of Vārtā.
(4) According to Kauṭilya it forms a part of the
King's curriculum of studies. He is advised
to learn Economics (Vārtā) from the heads of
the administrative departments. Vartamadhyakṣebhyaḥ (AŚ 1.5).
VĀSTU--A holding containing anyone or more of
the following-a residence, a cornfield, a plea-
sure garden, a fruit garden, or a pond. (AŚ
III.8).</p>
<pb n="170" />
<p>VIGRAHA--(1) Hostility (the opposite of Sandhi).
(2) One of the six modes of foreign policy (see
Śāḍguṇya).
(3) It is a sort of cold war when one party re-
mains harmful to the other. Cf. apakāro vigra-
haḥ (AŚ VII.1).
VIJĪGIṢU--Aggressor, the central figure in the
circle of allied and enemy Kings as conceived
in the Maṇḍala-theory. The Kings of the
circle are determined as Ari, Mitra, Arimitra
etc.with references to this Vijīgiṣu, and all the
precepts of the theorists are offered only to
fulfil the interest of the Vijīgiṣu.
VIDYĀ--(1) Title of a traditional list of four basic
sciences, viz. Ānvīkṣikī, Trayī, Vārtā and
Daṇḍanīti. (AŚ I.1).
(2) The subjects forming the King's curriculum
of studies, taken collectively (cf. AŚ. I.5 ;
and Manu Saṁ. VII. 43).
VINIYUKTA--(1) An officer immediately below
the rank of Āyukta. Vide., D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 375.
(2) May be equal to the term Viniyuktaka. (Ep.
Ind. Vol. XI. pp. 80-83).
VINDAMĀNĀ--A woman who remarries another
man after the death of the first husband. (AŚ
III.2).
VIRĀJ--(1) A king who enjoys "a higher degree of
supremacy as a King" signified by the term
Vairājya (q.v.).</p>
<pb n="171" />
<p>(2) This term is often found in the Brāhmaṇa
literature and the Mahābhārata.
(3) In the Mahābhārata, this term definitely
signifies a superiority of the monarch to whom
it is applied as an epithet. Cf. Śānti Parva,
43.11 and 68.54.
VIRUDDHARĀJYA—(1)=Pkt. Viruddharajjā.
(2) This term occurs in the Jaina Ācārāṅgasūtra,
quoted under Gaṇarājya (q.v.).
(3) This term seems to mean a State ruled by
two contending Kings at the same time. It is
different from Dvairājya, presumably, because
of Dvairājya being ruled by two rulers in com-
plete harmony while it is ruled by two rulers
who are opposed (viruddha) to each other.
(4) See also n.2 under Dvairājya for a reference
to this term in the AŚ.
VIVĀDAPADAS--(1) The sources of the state law.
They are four in number and are viz. Dharma,
Vyavahāra, Caritra and Rājaśāsana as given
by Kauṭilya in the verse:
dhārmaśca vyavahāraśca caritraṁ rājaśāsanam
vivādarthaścatuṣpādah paścimaḥ pūrvasādhakaḥ
(AŚ III.1).
(2) As found in a subsequent verse given by
Kauṭilya in the same context, Caritra is syno-
nymous with Saṁsthā and Rajaśasana means
Nyāya. anuśā saddhi dharmeṇa vyavahāreṇa saṁasthayā
nyāyena ca caturthena caturāṇtāṁ mahīṁ jayet (AŚ III. 1).
(3) Dharma=Dharmaśāstra or the sacred canon;
Vyavahāra= Vyavahārika (as given in the</p>
<pb n="172" />
<p>subsequent verse)= Vyāvahārika śāstra=the
Current Law, presumably, as laid down by the
Arthaśāstra, Caritra=Saṁsthā=usage ; and
Rājaśāsana=Śāsana=Nyāya=King's (good)
reasoning. Cf. U. N. Ghoshal, HIPI, p. 113.
VIVĪTĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of grazing
grounds (AŚ II.34).
VIŚ--(1) Plural Viśaḥ.
(2) The term refers to a number of villages
joined together by a tribal kinship. The chief of such a group of villages being called Viśpati.
(3) Also means 'the whole people', as in
'Viśastvā sarvā vāñchantu', 'Let you be desir-
able to all the people' (Ṛgveda, X. 173. 1;
Atharvaveda, VI. 87-1). Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 12 n.
VIŚPATI--The chief of a number of villages joined
together by a common tribal kinship. (See
VIŚ).
VIṢAMA-SANDHI--Opposite of Sama-sandhi
(q.v.). When in a treaty the two parties aim at
achieving two different gains, e.g., one aiming
at an ally (Mitra) and the other aiming at
wealth (Hiraṇya), the treaty is called a Viṣama-
sandhi (AŚ VII.9).
VIṢAYA--An administrative division of a State,
governed by an officer called the Viṣayapati.
But the meaning was not always uniform. Some-
time the term meant the whole territory. Cf. svayaṁ grasitāro nirviṣayāḥ kāryāḥ (Brāhmaṇas who voluntarily eat prohibited articles are to be expelled from the
whole territory) in AŚ IV.13, In</p>
<pb n="173" />
<p>some cases a Viṣaya was included in a Maṇḍala
and in some cases a Maṇḍala was included in a
Viṣaya, while in certain places both the terms
were used as synonyms. D. C. Sircar, Glossary, p. 377.
VISTI--(1) Service rendered by unpaid (voluntary)
labour (AŚ I.1).
(2) Service rendered by unpaid labours engaged
as a punishment (AŚ II.7).
(3) Wages paid to casual labour (AŚ II.6).
(4) Viṣṭi is the common designation of a varie-
ties of workmen like the Mārjaka (sweeper),
Ārakṣaka (guard), Dhāraka (weighing man), etc.
(Vide AŚ II.15).
(5) The host of workmen engaged in royal work
(AŚ II.35).
VAIDEHAKA VYAÑJANA—A spy or secret agent
in the guise of a merchant (AŚ I.16).
VAIYĀPṚTYAKARA--A retail seller. (AŚ III.
12).
VAIRĀJYA--(1)-Pkt. (Verajjaṁ).
(2) This term occurs in the Jaina Ācāraṅgasūtra
quoted under Gaṇarājya (q.v.).
(3) There is also a passage in the Aītareya
Brāhmaṇa, containing this term, where (as
explained by certain modern authorities) it is
recorded that the people in general (janapadāḥ)
belonging to the northern republics of Uttara-
kuru and Uttaramadra lying beyond the Hima-
layas were anointed to take part in Vairājya</p>
<pb n="174" />
<p>form of government. After being anointed the
people are called Virāṭ. ....tasmād etasyām udīcyaṁ diśi ye ke ca pareṇa himavan-
taṁ janapadā uttarakurava uttaramadrā iti vairājyāyaiva tebhiṣi-
cyante virāḍityanenābhiśiktān ācakṣata......
(4) According to Altekar this term denotes "a
republic, a state which had no king.'' Altekar, SGAI, p. 38.
(5) Jayaswal takes the term to mean literally
"the king less constitution". Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 78.
(6) Thus this term implies a form of republic
where there is no king and the political power
is vested in the people at large. Martin Haug (Aitaraya Brāhmaṇa, Vol. II, p. 518 n),
referred to by Jayaswal (Ibid., p. 78), also takes the people as a
whole to have been anointed for assuming the political autho-
rity. of."....for here are the Janapadāḥ, i.e., people in oppo-
sition to the king mentioned as abhishikta, i.e., anointed...,"
(7) Vairājya, with the meaning given above,
may be distinguished from Gaṇarājya by
assuming that the former is a 'government by
the people as a whole', while the latter is a
government by a group or Gaṇa'.
(8) In Arthaśāstra this term seems to have a
different meaning. In AŚ VIII. 2 Kauṭilya
discusses the superiority of Dvairājya (q.v.)
to Vairājya. There he seems to take the term
Vairājya in the sense of a "foreign rule, which
comes into existence by seizing the country</p>
<pb n="175" />
<p>from its King still alive". Shamasastry, Arthaśāstra (trans.), p. 353.
Jayaswal is unable to agree with this interpretation of the
term given by Shamasastry, because of his unnecessarily taking
it for granted that the same meaning of the term as we have
it in the Aitaraya Brahmaṇa is to be found also in the Artha-
śastra. Kauṭilya denounces this form of government on the ground that the
foreign ruler "can never think the forcibly seiz-
ed country to be his own; he taxes the people
unduly, shifts the seat of government to else-
where, or sells away the country to some other
party, or being disgusted leaves it and goes
away". Cf. "Vairājyaṁ tu jīvataḥ parasyacchidya
naitanmama iti manyamanaḥ karśayatyapavāhayati
paṇyam va karoti, viraktaṁ va parityajya apagacchatīti".
(AŚ VIII.2.).
In the Jaina Ācaraṇgasūtra also the Vairājya form of govern-
ment is denounced. Hence, the meaning of this term in that
work seems to be identical with the meaning in the Arthaśastra
and not with the meaning of the term, as used in the Vedic
literature,
(9) Sāyaṇa, while commenting on Aitareya
Brāhmaṇa, VIII. 14 ff. renders the term as
'distinction in rank from other Kings'. A. B.
Keith in the same context gives the translation
of the term as 'supreme authority' (vide,
the Ṛgveda--Brāhmaṇas : the Aitareya
Brāhmaṇa)
(10) According to Aitareya Brāhmaṇa, quoted
under 3 above the heads of a Vairājya are called
Virāṭ. But in the same context of Indramaha-
bhiseka in the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa and also in
a passage of the Atharva Veda (17-1-22) the</p>
<pb n="176" />
<p>same Indra is called Virāṭ, Svarāṭ and Samrāṭ.
This renders it difficult for us to understand
Vairājya as a republic with a 'group of people'
as its political heads. (See also our notes under
Svārājya).
VYAYAŚARĪRA--The heads of expenditure of
the State. Twenty-four such heads are enume-
rated by Kauṭilya in AŚ II.6.
VYAVAHĀRA--(1) Any transaction (AŚ III. 1). tirohita......kṛtāṁśca vyavahārān pratiṣedhayeyuḥ (AŚ III. 1).
(2) The Current Law as laid down in the Artha-'
śāstra. U. N. Ghoshal, A History of Indian Political Ideas, p. 113. In this sense it is one of the four Vivād-
apadas. dharmaśca vyavaharaśca cartitraṁ rājaśāsanam
vivādārthaścatuṣpadah paścimaḥ purvesadhakaḥ</p>
<p>(AŚ III. 1) (See Vivādapadas). (AŚ III.1)</p>
<p>(3) Judicial procedure. Cf. Vyavahāraṣtvāṁ pṛcchati (Mṛcchakaṭikā, IX).
(4) A legal dispute or a law suit. Cf Kna saha mama vyavāhāraḥ (Ibid) ?'
(5) Medhātithi on Manu Saṁ, VIII. 1, explains
it to mean either the legal efforts of the litiga-
nts to have advantage over each other' or 'the
transactions like loans and borrowings, when
they become subjects of dispute.'
(6) Amara gives (Vivāda) as a synonym of
Vyavahāra. (Vivado vyavahāraḥ, Amarakośa,
Svargavarga).
(7) =Vyāvahārikaśāstra. See No. 3 under Vi-
vadapadas.</p>
<pb n="177" />
<p>VYAVHĀRĪ--An administrator, (vide Ep. Ind.
XII). D. C. Sircar Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 383. Same as Vyāvahārika.
VYASANA--(1) A vice or bad practice or evil
habit.
(2) The vices probable on the part of a King are
broadly divided into two groups, viz. Kāmaja-
Vyasanas and the Krodhaja-vyasanas. Manu
asks the Kings to avoid these Vyasanas with
all effort. (Manu Saṁ. VII.45).
(3) There are ten varieties of Kāmaja-Vyasanas
(vices born of passion), viz., Mṛgayā (hunting),
Akṣa (dice-playing), Divāsvapna (sleeping in
the day time), Parivāda (scandal mongering),
Strī (undue association with woman), Mada
(indulgence in sex), Tauryatrika (singing,
dancing and playing on musical instruments)
and Vṛthāṭyā (loitering without any purpose). This term includes three Vyasanas.
Manu Saṁ. VII.47.
(4) There are eight varieties of Krodhaja
Vyasanas (vice born of anger), viz., Paiśūnya
(Calumny), Sāhasa, Droha (secret murdering),
Irṣā (jealousy), Asūyā (envy), Arthaduṣaṇa (non-
payment of legitimate wages etc.), Vākpāruṣya,
Daṇḍāparusya. Manu Saṁ. VII.48.
5) Kauṭilya uses the term Kopaja Vyasana for
Manu's Krodhaja Vyasana and he recognises
only three Kopaja Vyasanas, viz. Vākpārusya,
Daṇḍapāruṣya and Arthadūṣaṇa. For these
three taken together he uses the term Kopaja-
trivarga. (AŚ VIII.3).</p>
<pb n="178" />
<p>(6) Kauṭilya recognises only four Kāmaja
Vyasanas, viz., Mṛgayā (hunting), Dyūta
(dicing), Strī (women) and Pāna (wine). These
are together called Kāmaja Caturvarga.
VYĀJĪ--(1) One of seven Āyaśarīras (i.e., sources
of revenue). It is to be paid to the State in the
form of 5% of the commodities sold so as to
ensure against any loss due to wrong measure-
ment. (AŚ II. 6 and II.15).
(2) A 5% tax to be paid to the state when
somebody gets coins made for his own use with
metals supplied by himself in the royal mint
(AŚ II. 12).
(3) An additional surcharge to the tune of 5%
or any type of fine. (AŚ III.18).
VYĀYĀMA YUDDHA--An open conflict with use
of arms. (AŚ IX.2). Cf. mantrayuddhacca bhuyo vyāyāma yuddham.... (AŚ
IX.2).
VYUSTA--The regnal year or a month or a fortnight
of a day as counted from the date of the king's
coronation (vide, AŚ II.6). rājavarṣaṁ māsaḥ pakṣo divasaśca vyuṣṭam (AŚ II.6).
VYŪHA--(1) A military array. According to Us'
anas, a Vyūha consists of three divisions viz.
Pakṣau (wings), Urasyam (Vanguard), and
Pratigrāha (rear-guard). According to Bṛhas-
pati, there is yet another division viz. Kakṣau
(the flanks), (vide. AŚ X.6 and cf. Kāmaṇḍaka
Nītisāra. XX.31).
(2) In the Mahābhārata we hear of innumerable
varieties of Vyūhas, appearing more to be based</p>
<pb n="179" />
<p>on poetical fancy and poet's love of rhetorics.
In AŚ a more rational classification is given
and the main varieties named there are :
Daṇḍa (staff-like), Bhoga (snake-like), Maṇḍala
(circular) and Asaṁhata (detached). For details see P. C. Chakravarty, Art of War in Ancient India, pp. 112-13.
(3) In Manu Saṁ. VII. 187 f we have some va-
rieties of Vyūha named as Daṇḍa, Sakaṭā (cart-
like), Varāha (boar like), Makara (shark-like),
Sūcī (Needle-like) and Padma (lotus-like).
VRAJA--One of the seven sources of royal in-
come to be supervised by the Samāhartā. This
income occurs from eight varieties of animals
viz. Go (cow), Mahiṣa (Buffalo) etc. (vide.
AŚ II.6)
ŚAKTI--(1) The power of a King, particularly of
a King who is in a mood to attack (i.e., of the
Vijīgiṣu).
(2) There are three such Śaktis, viz. Utsāha-śakti
(the strength of marital spirit and physical
prowess), Prabhāvaśakti (the strength of ma-
terial wealth and political supremacy) and
Mantraśakti (the power secured by superior
statesmanship and diplomacy and counsel). It is also called Prabhu-śakti. See S. Mookerjee, Political wisdom of ancient India.
Journal of the Bihar Research Society, XXXXV. parts 1-IV,
1959.</p>
<pb n="180" />
<p>(3) In AŚ IX. 1, Kauṭilya discusses the rela-
tive superiority of the three kinds of Śakti, and
opines that the second is superior to the first
and the third is superior to the second.
ŚATRU--See Ari.
ŚAMA--(1) Peace.
(2) Policy of peace. Cf. Bhāravi's Kirātārjunīya, I. 42.
(3) A state of mutual trust between Kings. In
this sense this term is synonymous with Sandhi
(q.v.) and Samādhi (AŚ XVII. 17).
ŚĀSANA--(1) The King's writs which are divided
into eight varieties by Kauṭilya under appro-
priate titles in AŚ II. 10. Cf. the first śāsana
in the statement : śāsane śāsanam ityācakṣate
(AŚ II. 10).
(2) The rule or the royal sway. Cf. the second
śāsana in the line quoted from AŚ II. 10 above
or śāsanapradhānā hi rājānaḥ (Ibid).
(3) The royal command, (Raghuvaṁśa, 14.83).
(4) Any royal charter (cf. Nidhanpur C.P. Grant
of Bhāskara varman, V. 28. vide Kāmarūpaśā-
sanāvalī p. 27).
(5) King's decree (Ājñā) which is more precisely
called Rājaśāsana (=Rājājnā) which is said to
be one of the four feet of the subject-matter of a
suit (Vivādārtha) by Kauṭilya in AŚ III. la.
As found in a subsequent verse given by
Kauṭilya this decree is based on King's good
reasoning, as Rājaśāsana is said to be
synonymous with Nyāya in that verse. (See
Vivādapadas).</p>
<pb n="181" />
<p>ŚĀSANAHARA-DŪTA--(1) A royal messenger,
who merely delivers the message and takes
back the reply; he cannot negotiate of his own
accord. A. S. Altekar. SGAI, p. 301.
(2) He possesses only half of the qualities of an
Amātya. ardhaguṇahīnaḥ śāsanaharaḥ (AŚ I. 16).
(3) Because of possessing half of the qualities
of an ideal Amātya he may be supposed to be of
the status of a third grade Amātya. (See
Amātya-sampat).
ŚĀSAYITĀ--One who prepares a copper plate
grant. Cf. Nidhanpur C.P. Grant of Bhāskara-
varman, line 135. (Kāmarūpaśāsanāvalī, p. 26).
ŚIVIRA--A military camp. See Skandhāvāra.
ŚUDDHA VADHA--Capital punishment without
physical torture. (AŚ IV. 10).
ŚULKA--(1) A toll or customs duty. (vide AŚ
II. 21 etc. cf. Manu Saṁ. 8.159).
(2) According to Kauṭilya there are three va-
rieties of Śulka, viz. Vāhyaśulka (Duty levied on
goods produced in the countryside), Ābhyantara
śulka (Duty levied on goods produced in the city)
and Ātithya śulka (Duty levied on goods pro-
duced outside the country). Each of these three
types of Śulka are again sub-divided into two
types viz., Niṣkrāmya śulka (Export duty) and
Prāveśya śulka (Import duty) (vide AŚ II. 22).
(3) Manu uses the term also in the sense of a
purchase-price for a bride. cf. Manu Saṁ.
III. 51, VIII, 204, IX. 93 etc.</p>
<pb n="182" />
<p>(4) According to Amara the ferry duties and
similar dues are called Śulka. ghaṭṭādideyaṁ śulkostrī (Amara kośa, Ksatriya varga).
(5) Compare also the term Vali.
ŚULKĀDHYAKṢA--(1) Superintendent of tolls
or customs duties. (AŚ II. 21).
(2) Toll collector or customs officer.
(3) In certain places this officer is also called
Śaulkika.
SŪNĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of slaughter-
houses. He is to see that only such animals
which are permitted to be killed by the state are
butchered in the slaughter houses and is to
ensure that only fresh and bone-less meat is
sold in the market. The duties of this officer
are detailed in AŚ II. 26.
ŚAULKIKA—(1) Same as Śulkādhyakṣa.
(2) Superintendent of tolls or customs duties.
(3) Toll-collector or customs officer.
(4) This term is used in Pāla and Paramāra
Inscriptions in the sense of a Śulkdhyakāsa. cf.
also Yājñavalkyaṣmṛti. II. 173. Cf. U.N. Ghoshal, Hindu Revenue System, p. 246.
ŚREṆĪ--(1) A guild or company of traders, artis-
ans etc. (Apte). Cf. kāruḥ śilpī saṁhataistairdvayoḥ śreṇīh sajātibhiḥ
(Amarakośa, Śudrvarga). In Arthaśāstra, IV.1, this term
is used in this sense in the context of the beha-
viour of the artisans (Kāru).
(2) From various references, such as one in AŚ
VIII.4., to Śreṇī and Śreṇīmukhya in the same</p>
<pb n="183" />
<p>place, the Śreṇīs seem to have had some sort of
self-government and a corporate life.
(3) From other references, such as one in AŚ
VII. 1, the srenis (guilds) seem to have been
maintaining their own troops. Cf. "āyudhīyaprāyaśśreṇiprayo va me janapadah...."
etc. (AŚ. VII. 1). These are the
troops referred to by the term Śreṇī-bala of the
sixfold division of army (i.e. Ṣaḍaṇga bala).
According to R. C. Majumdar there were certain
such guilds, members whereof "followed some
industrial arts and carried on military profession
at one and the same time". Corporate Life in Ancient India (1922), pp 30-31.
(4) In the discussion on Sa ṁgha-republics, Kau-
ṭilya once again mentions the term Śreṇī. Cf.
kāmboja surāṣṭra-kṣatriya-śreṇvādayo vārtāśastro-
pajīvinaḥ (AŚ XI. 1).
Here the term does not mean a guild. Here
Śreṇī is a proper name and it is the name of a
Saṁgha-republic. In the given quotation Kau-
ṭilya mentions four Saṁgha-republics and they
are the republics of the Kāmbojas, the Surāṣt-
ras, the Kṣatriyas and the Śreṇīs. Kauṭilya fur-
ther informs that the citizens of these republics
followed industry and agriculture and fighting
as their profession. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, pp. 51-53.. In the quoted passage
Kṣatriya and Śreṇī are mentioned as two repub-
lics side by side. In the records of the Macedon-
ian writers also we have reference to two neigh-
bouring states of Sind, viz. Xathroi and Agesi-
nae. The first of these two names corresponds</p>
<pb n="184" />
<p>to Kṣatriya and the second to Agra-śreṇī.
Kauṭilya's Śreṇī is possibly an abbreviation of
Agra-śreṇī of the Macedonian records. Jayaswal, Ibid., pp. 52 f.
ŚREṆĪ-BALA--Troops raised from the guilds. For several other probable but less convincing interpre-
tations of the term see P. C. Chakravarti, The Art of War in
Ancient India, p. 5 f.
See Saḍaṇga bala and Śreṇī.
ŚREṆĪMUKHYA. The leader of a guild (Śreṇī).
Though the Śreṇīs were somewhat autonomous,
their leaders used to get a salary from the king
and the same is fixed at 8000 paṇas per annum</p>
<p>(AŚ. V. 3 and VIII. 4.)</p>
<p>ṢADAṄGA-BALA--(1) The six-fold army con-
risting of Maula (hereditary troops), Bhaṛtaka
(mercenary soldiers), Śreni (troops raised from
the guilds), Mitra (soldiers supplied by feuda-
tory chiefs or allies), Amitra (soldiers won
over from the enemy), and Aṭavībala (soldiers
received from forest rulers). Also called Bhṛta-bala or Bhṛtya-bala. Also called Suhṛd-bala. Also called Dviṣad-bala.
Also called Āṭavika-bala. Cf. maula-bhṛtaka-śreṇī-mitra-amitra-aṭavī-balānāṁ samut-
thānakālaḥ (AŚ. IX. 1).
(2) Manu Saṁhitā, VII.185 refers to a six-fold
army (ṣaḍvidhaṁ balaṁ), which is explained by
Kulluka as Senā and Karmakaras (workmen) in</p>
<pb n="185" />
<p>addition to Hastī, Aśva, Ratha and Padāti. hastyaśvarathapadātisenā karmakarātmakaṁ ṣaḍvidhaṁ
balam (Kulluka's Com. on Manu Saṁ VII.185). It
is not clear what is meant by the term Senā,
when the infantry is already recognised by the
term Padāti.
(3) It is quite probable that in Kulluka's com.
Padāti-senā is a single word meaning the infan-
try. Another word Kośa is dropped out due to
scribal or printing mistake. For, Medhātithi
clearly names Hastī, Aśva, Ratha, Padātisenā,
Kośa (treasure) and Karmakara (workmen),
while referring to others, interpretation of the
expression ṣaḍvidhaṁ balam. Medhātithi's own
view is that the expression ṣaḍvidha-bala refers
to Maula, Bhṛtya-, Śreni-, Mitra-, Amitra and
Āṭavika-bala. Cf. hastyaśva-ratha-padāti-senā-kośa-karmakarātmakaṁ
ṣaḍvidhaṁ balam ityanye....maulabhṛtyaśreṇīmitrā-mitrāṭavika-
bala bhedāt (Medhātithi on Manu Saṁ VII. 185).
Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva, 121, 44 mentions also an eight-
fold division of the army, containing 'the usual four and workmen,
officers, spies and military guides' (see P. C. Chakravarti, The
Art of War in Ancient India, p. 2). The text of the relevant
verse in the Citrasala Press Edn., however, seems to give a
different list. Cf.
hastinośvā rathāḥ pattirnāvo vististathaiva ca daiśikāś cāvikā-
ścaiva tadaṣṭāṅgaṁ balam smṛtam.
Here, Viṣṭi-workman, daiśikāḥ-military guides, nāvah
seems to mean boats and āvikāḥ most probably mean the spies in
the guise of shepherds. Kauṭilya in AŚ IX. 2 discusses
the relative superiority of the six types of army,
viz. Maulabala, Bhṛtabala, etc. In the given
list the later ones are successively inferior to the
earlier ones in the matter of keeping ready for</p>
<pb n="186" />
<p>an engagement, cf. (pūrvaṁ pūrvaṁ caiṣāṁ
śreyas sannāhayitum) (AŚ. IX. 2).
ṢAḌVIDHA-BALA--See Ṣaḍaṅga-bala.
ṢAḌGUṆYA--(1)=Ṣaḍguṇāḥ.
(2) =The six modes of foreign policy taken to-
gether. The six modes are viz. Sandhi (peace or
alliance), Vigraha (conflict or a sort of cold war),
Yāna (military expedition against the enemy),
Āsana (waiting in preparedness for repelling a
charge), Saṁśraya (seeking shelter with another
mighty king), Dvaidhībhāva (duplicity) (AŚ.
VII. 1).
(3) Cf. sandhir nā vigraho yānam āsanaṁ dvai-
dham āśrayaḥ ṣaḍguṇāh (Amarakośa, Kṣatriya-
varga). Here, Dvaidham is given for Dvaidhībh-
āva, and the article nā signifies masculine
gender of the word Sandhi.
(4) See also Yājñavalkya Smṛti, I. 347, Manu
Saṁhitā, VII. 160, etc.
SACIVA--(1)=Minister.
(2) =Counsellor.
(3) Manu suggests that a king should appoint
seven or eight Sacivas after fully testing them. sacivān sapta cāṣṭau vā prakurvīta parīkṣitān (Manu Saṁ, VII. 54).
Kulluka in this context gives the meaning of
Saciva as Amātya. Hence a Saciva is same as
Amātya (q.v.) in duty, responsibility and status.</p>
<pb n="187" />
<p>(4) According to Amara, there are two types of
Saciva, viz., Dhīsaciva and Karmasaciva. The
Dhīsaciva is a Mantrī or counsellor taking vital
part in policy matters. The Karmasaciva is an
executive officer. mantrī dhīsacivomātyo'nye kar masacivāstataḥ (Amarakośa,
Kṣatriyavarga).
SACIVĀYATTĀ-SIDDHI--Administration con-
ducted by (literally dependent on) the Minister
(without duly consulting the king). This term
is used in Mudrārākṣasa III. See Siddhi.
SATRĪ-A kind of spies, very intimately associa-
ted with the King and maintained by the King.
They learn astrology, astronomy, sorcery, folk
lore on omens and other allied sciences and
roam about in the guise of students for carry-
ing out some secret missions. (AŚ. I.10,
I.12 etc.).
SANDHI--(1) Peace or alliance.
(2) It is one of the six modes of foreign policy
(see Sāḍguṇya).
(3) It is an agreement between two hostile Kings
to stop hostility on the basis of certain agreed
terms in respect of land, wealth, etc. Cf. paṇa-
bandhaḥ sandhiḥ (AŚ. VII. 1).
(4) A state of mutual trust between Kings. In
this sense Sandhi, Śama and Samādhi are syno-
nyms. Cf. śamasāsandhissamādhi rityekor-
thaḥ rājñāṁ viśvāsopagamah śamas-sandhi-samā-
dhiriti (AŚ. VII. 17).
(5) Kauṭilya in AŚ. VII.9 describes three sub-
varieties of Sandhi, viz. Śamasandhi, Vi,ama-</p>
<pb n="188" />
<p>sandhi and Atisandhi in one manner, and another
five sub-varieties, viz. Mitrasandhi, Hiraṇya-
sandhi, Bhūmisandhi, Karmasandhi and Ana-
vasitasandhi (q.v.), in another manner.
SANNIDHĀTĀ—(1) Treasury officer.
(2) A top official in charge of the development
and protection of the royal exchequer.
(3) AŚ. II.5 suggests that he should supervise
the construction of the treasury, the house of
commerce, the granary, the store, the armou-
ry and the jail.
(4) Sannidhātā is one of the 18 Mahāmātras.
(5) This term corresponds to the Samgrahita
(q.v.) of the list of Ratnins (q.v.).
SAPTA-PRAKRTAYAH--The seven mutually
beneficial elements of the state. Same as Sap-
tāṅga (q.v.). Kauṭilya (AŚ. VI.1) uses the term
Prakṛti in this sense, while Kāmandaka (IV.1)
uses the term Aṅga. Altekar calls them
"the seven constituents of the state", while
Ghoshal the seven constituent elements (pra-
kṛiti) of the political organisation (rājya)'. SGAI, p. 45. HIPI, p. 84.
SAPTĀṆGA--(1) The seven mutually beneficial
elements (of constituents) of the state. Cf. svāmyamātyaśca rāṣṭṛaṁ ca durgaṁ kośo balaṁ suhṛt
pasparopakārīdaṁ saptāṅgaṁ rājyam ucyate. (Kāmandaka, IV.1). They are
named by Kāmandaka as, Svāmī (the King),
Amātya (the Ministers), Rāṣṭra (the territory
along with the people), Durga (the fort), Kośa</p>
<pb n="189" />
<p>(the exchequer), Bala (the military power or
force) and Suhṛt (allies).
(2) Manu calls them the seven Prakṛtis and also
the seven Aṅgas. Cf. svāmyamatyau puraṁ rāṣṭraṁ kośadaṇḍau suhṛt tathā
sapta prakṛtayo hyetāḥ saptāṇgaṁ rājyam ucyate (Manu Saṁ,
IX. 294). Cf. saptāṅgaṁ rājyaṁ ucyate (Manu Saṁ, IX. 294) and
saptāṅgasyeha rājyasya, etc. (Manu Saṁ, IX. 296). In the list of Aṅgas or
Prakṛtis, given by Manu, we have Pura in the
sense of the fortified royal city in place of
Durga, and Daṇḍa (the four-fold army) in
place of Bala. Cf. puraṁ rājnaḥ kṛtadurga-nivaśanagaram (Kulluka's Com.
on Manu Saṁ. IX. 294).
(3) Kauṭilya applies the term Prakrti for Aṅga.
In his list of Sapta Prakṛtayaḥ, we have Durga
in place of Pura, Janapada (the territory along
with the people) in place of Rāṣtṛa, and Mitra
(allies) for Suhṛt. svāmyamātya-janapadadurga-kośa-daṇḍa-mitrāni Prakṛta-
yaḥ (AŚ. VI.1).
(4) Mahābhārata uses the term Saptāṅga (Śānti
Parva, 59.51). Saptaṅgasya ca rājyasya hrāsavṛddhisamañjasam.
The seven Aṅgas (elements)
are named as Ātma (self, i.e., Svāmī), Amātya,
Kośa, Daṇḍa, Mitrāni, Janapadaḥ and Pura. Śānti Parva, 69.64-65.
SABHĀ--A popular assembly of the Vedic age.
"Probably it was a standing and stationary body
of selected men working under the Samiti. The
Sabhā had its president called Sabhāpati". The
Sabha worked as the national judicature. Vide Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 17 f, In</p>
<pb n="190" />
<p>Atharvaveda Sabhā is described as a sister of
Samiti. Cf. sabhā ca ma samitiścāvatām prajā-paterduhitarau
saṁvidāne (Atharvaveda, 7. 13.1). "Perhaps the first was a meeting of
the great men of the tribe while the second was
a mass gathering of all free tribesmen or of
heads of families. These two bodies exerted
much influence on the king and their approval
was necessary to ensure his accession". Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 33.
SAMADHIGATAPAÑCA-MAHĀŚABDA--See
Prāpta-pañca-mahā-śabda.
SAMĀDHI--Political reconciliation. A state of
mutual trust between Kings. In this sense it is
synonymous with Śama and Sandhi. (AŚ. VII.
17).
SAMĀHARTĀ--(1) Collector of Revenue. He is
required to supervise the seven sources of reve-
nue income of the state, viz. Durga, Rāṣṭra,
Khani, Setu, Vana, Vraja and Vanikpatha as
detailed in AŚ II.6.
(2) One of the 18 Tīrthas. (see Tīrtha).
(3) Samāhartä was to divide the entire country-
side into four sectors each of which was to be put
under the charge of a subordinate officer called
Sthānika and into certain Blocks (each con-
taining some five to ten villages), each of which
was to be put under the charge of a subordinate
officer called Gopa (AŚ II. 35). Through these
subordinate officers the Samāhartā kept a
record of the population, produce and other
sources of income etc.</p>
<pb n="191" />
<p>(4) The term Samāhartā corresponds to the term
Bhāgadhuk (q.v.) of the list of Ratnīns (q.v.).
SAMITI-The greatest popular assembly of the
Vedic age. The Samiti was the gathering of the
whole race or of the heads of all the families.
Its main function was to elect the King. A
King could remain in office only so long as he
could be agreeable to the Samiti. Cf. dhruvāya te samitiḥ kalpatāmiha (Atharvaveda, 6.88.3)
(Let you definitely remain the choice of the Samiti).
In a cele-
brated hymn of the Ṛgveda there is a prayer for
'a common Samiti' and 'a common policy of
State'. Cf. samāno mantraḥ samitiḥ samānī (Rgveda X. 191.3). Hence, we may gather that the Samiti used to deliberate on policy matters also. In the
Atharvaveda, Samiti is described as the sister
of Sabhā (q.v.). See Basham, The Wonder that was India, P. 33 and Jayas-
wal, Hindu Polity, pp. 12 f.
SAṀUDAYA--Properly received royal income
from various sources of income (AŚ II.6, II. 8).
SAṀGRAHAṆA--An administrative circle consist-
ing of ten villages. Each Saṁgrahaṇa was to be
under an administrative officer called Gopa.
(AŚ II.1).
SAṀGRAHITĀ--(1) The royal Treasurer. As such
he is one of the eleven Ratnīns (q.v.).
(2) In time of Kauṭilya, this high officer came
to be called Sannidhātā (q.v.).
SAṀGHA--(1) =Gaṇa, a tribal republic.
(2) That Saṁgha is a synonym of Gaṇa is evi-</p>
<pb n="192" />
<p>denced by Pāṇini III.3.86 and Majjhima
Nikāya (1.4.5.35). Saṁghodghau.gaṇa-praśaṁsayoḥ (Pāṇini III. 3. 86).
imesam pihi bho gotama samghānaṁ ganānaṁ seyathīdam
vājjinaṁ mallānaṁ (Majjhima Nikāya, 1.4.6.35).
(3) Typical examples of Saṁgha-republics are
those of the Vajjis and Mallas referred to in the
Majjhima Nikāya.
(4) From Kauṭilya we learn that States with
Saṁgha form of government were prevalent
side by side with the states with monarchical
form of government. In AŚ XI.1 he observes
that a king should always endeavour to gain the
Saṁghas as ally. The gain of the Saṁghas as
ally is the best amongst the gains of wealth,
arms and army. Saṁghalābho daṇḍa-mitra-lābhānām uttamaḥ (AŚ XI. 1).
He further observes that the
Saṁghas are unvulnerable to the enemies be-
cause of their unity. Saṁgha hi saṁhatatvādadhṛsyaḥ pareṣām (AŚ XI. 1).
Some of the Saṁgha-
republics named by Kauṭilya are--Licchivikas,
Vrajikas, Mallakas, Madrakas, Kukuras, Kurus
and Pañcālas. See AŚ XI. 1.
SAṀGHA-MUKHYA--(1) Same as Gaṇa-mukhya.
(2) While the term Gaṇa refers to the entire
political community (having a republican type
of government without a single King) there seems
to have been a governing body of the republics,
comprising of the Gaṇamukhyas (Gaṇa-chiefs)
and a Gaṇa-pradhana (Gaṇa-president). Cf. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, p. 103.
(3) Kauṭilya suggests fair and foul means for
polluting the character of the Saṁgha-mukhyas</p>
<pb n="193" />
<p>for the purpose of winning the Saṁgha-repub-
lics by weakening their political fabric in AŚ
XI.1. But in the concluding verse of the same
chapter he observes that the Saṁgha-mukhya
should administer justice, should have control
over his senses, should be energetic, should be
dear to the citizens and should always endeavour
to attract their mind. Cf. saṁgha-mukhyaśca saṁgheṣu nyāya-vṛttihitahpriyaḥ
dānto yuktajanastisthet sarvacittāṇuvartakaḥ (AŚ XI. 1).
(4) Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva (Ch. 107, VV. 23-
25) instructs that it is the duty of the Gaṇa-
mukhyas to conduct the affairs of the commu-
nity.(lokayātrā samāyāttā). The policy resolutions
should remain with the Gaṇa-praḍhāna, and the
entire political community (i.e. the Gaṇas)
should not learn all the policies in their entirety.
The Gaṇa-pradhana should finalise the policies
in the interest of the Gaṇa (the entire political
community) in a meeting with the Gaṇa-mu-
khyas. Cf. Jayswal loc. cit, and the following :
tasmān mānayitavyāste gaṇamukhyāḥ pradhānataḥ
lokayātra samāyattā bhuyasī teṣu pārthiva
mantraguptiḥ pradhaneṣu cāraścāmitrakarśanam
na gaṇaḥ kṛtsnaśo mantraṁ śrotum arhanti bhārata
gaṇamukyaistu saṁbhuya kāryam ganahitam mithaḥ
(Mahābhārata, Śānti Parva, Ch. 107. VV. 23-25).
SAMRĀṬ--An emperor, having lordship over a
number of feudatories, his empire being known
as Sāmrājya. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 94; Altekar, SGAI,
p. 37. This term has almost the same
connotation since the Vedic age. Cf.</p>
<pb n="194" />
<p>varuṇaḥ samrāṭ samrāṭpatiḥ sāmrājyam asmin
yajñe (Śatapatha-Brāhmaṇa, 11-4-3-10) (Varuṇa
is the universal sovereign, the lord of universal
sovereigns; the universal sovereignty originated
in him....). This term used to imply a higher
degree of supremacy of the king to which it is
applied as an epithet. Cf. Mahābhārata, Śānti
Parva, 43.11 and 68.54.
SAṀŚAYA-TRIVARGA--Artha and Anartha,
Dharma and Adharma, Kāma and Śoka-these
three pairs are together called Saṁśaya-trivarga
as each of these pairs involves some Saṁśaya
(a state of getting puzzled) (AŚ. IX.7).
SAṀŚRAYA--(1) Seeking shelter.
(2) It is one of the six modes of foreign policy
(see Ṣāḍguṇya).
(3) Kauṭilya maintains that a King, being in
hostility with another, takes shelter with yet
another more powerful King by surrendering
himself and his belongings, cf. parārpaṇaṁ
saṁśrayaḥ (AŚ VII.1).
SAHAJA-BALA--Strength of a King's own self.
SAHAJA-MITRĀ--See Mitra.
SAHAJA-ŚATRU--An enemy by birth. A King of
a different country who happens to bear some
family relation with the Vijīgiṣu, becomes an
enemy of this sort. Cousins and even full-blooded
brothers are apt to come under this category. S. Mookerjee, Political Wisdom of Ancient India, Journal of the Bihar Research Society, XXXXV, parts I-IV. December
1959.
(See Ari).</p>
<pb n="195" />
<p>SAHOḌHA--The son of a woman married in a
pregnant state by another man (with or without
the knowledge of her pregnancy) is a Sahoḍha
son to the present husband of the woman.
(Manu Saṁ. IX. 173) (cf. AŚ. III.7).
SĀKṢĪ--A witness, an eye-witness.
SĀNDHIVIGRAHIKA--Minister for peace and
war. Allahabad Stone Pillar Inscription of Samudragupta (line
32) describes the author Hariseṇa as a Sāndhivigrahika. See,
D. C. Sircar, Select Inscriptions, p. 268 n. 1.
He had also 'more definite military func-
tions and often accompanied the King on cam-
paign'. Basham, The Wonder that was India, p. 100.
SĀMA--(1) The first of the four Upāyas (q.v.).
(2) It is the policy of conciliation or negotiation
used as a means of success against an enemy.
(3) According to Kauṭilya there are five kinds
of Sama, viz. Guṇasaṁkīrtana (flattery), Saṁ-
bandhopākhyāna (references to close and cor-
dial relationship), Parasparopakārasandarśana
(acknowledgement of good done to each other),
Āyatipradarśana (reference to the prospect of
certain mutual benefits), Ātmopanidhāna (sur-
render of wealth for mutual free use with the
acknowledgement of mutual non-difference).
(AŚ. II. 10).
SAMANTA--(1) A feudatory ruler. D. C. Sircar, Indian Epigraphical Glossary, p. 289. Apte,
Students' Sanskrit English Dictionary, p. 598.
(2) A neighbour. AŚ. III.8 etc.; Apte, Ibid.</p>
<pb n="196" />
<p>SAMAVĀYIKA—A group of allied Kings. (AŚ.
VII.5).
SAMASANDHI--When in a treaty (Sandhi) there
is an agreement to stop hostility for achieving a
common gain, the treaty is called Samasandhi.
For example, if both the parties aim at gaining
an ally (Mitra) it is a Sama-sandhi (AŚ. VII.9).
SAMBANDHOPĀKHYĀNA—(1) One of the five
varieties of Sāma (q.v.). It is an act of con-
ciliation by way of referring to close and cordial
relationship, already existing between the
parties concerned, which is based on identity of
family, matrimony, similarity of education,
priesthood, family tradition, mutual attraction
of heart and mutual benefit.
Cf. jñāti-yauna-maukha-śrauvakula-hṛdaya-mitra-
saṁkīrtanam saṁbandhopākhyānam (AŚ. II.10).
SAMBHŪYA SAMUTTHĀNA--A joint trade by a
group or company. (AŚ. III.14).
SĀMRĀJYA--(1) The term occurs in several
prayers and oaths of the Vedic literature.
Sāyaṇa commenting on Aitareya Brāhmaṇa,
8-37-5 gives the meaning of the term as 'rule
with justice'. A.B. Keith renders the term as
'overlordship'. Basu, IAB, p. 87.
(2) In later literature the term also meant an
empire.
SĀṀVYĀVAHĀRIKA--A middle man who earns
livelihood by purchasing and selling goods pro-
duced by others. (AŚ. III.12).</p>
<pb n="197" />
<p>SĀRVA-BHAUMA--A paramount soveriegn whose
unrivalled political sway extends up to the farth-
est limits of the land. In the Vedic literature he
is also called an Ekarāṭ, and the term Samanta
is given as a synonym of Sārvabhauma.
Cf. ayaṁ samantaparyāyī syāt sārvabhaumaḥ....
samudraparyantāyā ekarāḍiti (Aitareya Brāh-
maṇa, 8-39-1).
SĀHASA--(1) Any criminal act like robbery and
rape, a heinous crime, an aggressive act. Apte, Students' Sanskrit English Dictionary, p. 602.
(2) Day light robbery accompanied by force
(AŚ. III. 17). sāhasam anvayayat prasabhakarma. In III.17 Kauṭilya distinguishes
between Sāhasa and Steya.
(3) In Manu Saṁ. VII.48 it is mentioned as one
of the eight Krodhaja vyasanas, where Medhāti-
thi explains the term as 'employment of a super-
rior in an inferior job' or 'fine or imprisonment
meted out for a negligible crime'. sāhasam jyāyaso nīcakarmaṇi viniyogaḥ, svalpenaiv
āparādhena karādhānaṁ kārāvarodho vā (Medhātithi under Manu
Saṁ. VII. 48).
(4) In Manu Saṁ. VIII.6 the term Sāhasa is
mentioned side by side with Steya, where the
meaning of Śahasa seems to be 'an open crime'
as in AŚ. III.17, since, in Manu Saṁ. VIII.6
the term is mentioned in the context of litiga-
tion.
(5) In Manu Saṁ. VIII.138 the term Sāhasa is
used in the sense of a fine or punishment. Cf. Yajnavalkya Smṛti, I. 66 etc.</p>
<pb n="198" />
<p>(6) According to Amara, Sāhasa is synonymous
to Dāṇḍa (punishment). sāhasantu damo daṇḍah (Amara, Kṣatriya varga).
SIDDHI--Success. It is the main objective of
foreign policy. (AŚ. IX.7). Viśākhadatta in his
drama, Mudrārākṣasa uses the term in the sense
of 'administration'. As translated by Dhruva.
Cf. iha khalvarthaśāstrakārās-trividhāṁ siddhim upavarṇayanti
rājāyattāṁ sacivāyattām ubhayāyattāṁ ca (Mudrārāksasa
III). "Authors of works on politics speak of three forms of
administration in this world.......'' (Dhruva's
translation). He speaks of three kinds
of administration, viz. Sacivāyattā Siddhi
(Ministerial administration), Rājāyattā Siddhi
(administration dependent on the King or an
autocratic administration) and Ubhayāyattā
Siddhi (joint administration).
SĪTĀ--(1) All types of grains collected and brought
to the Koṣṭhāgāra by the Śitādhyakṣa (AŚ II.9). sītādhyakṣopanītaḥ śasyavarṇakaḥ sītā.
(2) Literally a furrow and hence the cultivable
land or earth in general as in AŚ. VII.17,
where it is mentioned after agni (fire) and udaka
(water) and said to have been touched in time of
swearing or taking oath.
SĪTĀTYAYA--(1) A type of levy on agricultural
products. (AŚ. II.12).
(2) A fine for stealing corn from another man's
field (AŚ. V.2).
SĪTĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of Agriculture
(AŚ. II. 24). This officer was responsible for
the cultivation of the crown-lands.</p>
<pb n="199" />
<p>SŪTA--(1) A charioteer.
(2) A bard or minstrel.
(3) A chronicler.
(4) Sūta is mentioned as one of the eleven
Ratnins (q.v.). As such Sūta may be taken to
be either the court minstrel cum chronicler or
the commander of the royal chariot corps cum
King's charioteer.
(5) The son of a Kṣatriya by a woman of the
Brāhmaṇa caste. (Manu Saṁ, 10.11). Cf. Kṣatriyād viprakanyāyāṁ sūto bhavati jātitaḥ (Manu Saṁ. 10.11). Compare also: Kṣatriyāt suta eva tu, (Ibid. 10.11).
SŪTRĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of Weaving.
He was expected to supervise the state won
cloth industry (AŚ. II.23). This officer is
called Vastrādhipa in Śukranītisāra (II.118).
SURĀDHYAKṢA--Superintendent of distilleries
and drinking houses (AŚ. II.25).
SUVARṆĀDHYAKṢA--An officer engaged to
supervise the act of purification of gold, silver
etc. (AŚ. II.13).
SETU--(1) A dam (vide AŚ. II.1).
(2) Some five sources of royal income viz.
Puṣpavāṭa (flower garden), Phalavāṭa (fruit
garden), etc. enumerated in AŚ. II. 6 are to-
gether known as Setu.
(3) Mark for demarcating boundary between two
plots of land or between two villages etc. vide
AŚ. III.8 and Manu Saṁ. VIII.245.
SETU-BANDH--A dam (AŚ. II.1).
SENĀNĪ—(1) A leader of an army.</p>
<pb n="200" />
<p>(2) Amara gives Vāhinīpati as a synonym. senānirvāhinīpatiḥ (Amarakośa, Kṣatriyavarga).
(3) The first of the eleven Ratnins (q.v.).
SENĀPATI--(1) A general who is in command of
ten Padikas while the Padika is in command of
ten Aṅgas. aṅgadaśakasyaikaḥ patiḥ padikaḥ padikadaśakasyaikaḥ
senāpatiḥ (AŚ. X.56). This officer was in charge of the
training of all the branches of the army in
respect of position, expedition, signalling, etc.
(AŚ. II. 33). Cf. P. C. Chakravarty, The Art of War in Ancient India,
p. 83.
(2) One of the 18 Tīrthas (See Tīrtha).
SENĀMUKHA--A unit of army comprising three
Pattis, or in other words, 3 chariots, 3 elephants,
9 horses and 15 footmen. (AW AI, p. 83).
SAUVARṆIKA--A royal officer engaged to super-
vise the trade of the goldsmith and the silver-
smith etc. (vide, AŚ. II.13).
SKANDHĀVĀRA—(1) A military camp. Another
word often used in this sense is Śivira. But,
Śilpatantra, a work of unknown date, seems to
maintain a distinction between the two terms.
A military camp, of a person desirous of conquests
and equipped with the four-fold army, situated
either at a foreign country or in his own, is
called a Śivira, while to be called a Skandhāvāra
an actual fight between two kings must take
place at the vicinity of the camp. Ibid,, p. 106.</p>
<pb n="201" />
<p>(2) This term is often used in the sense of the
royal capital. Cf. Mukunda Madhava Sharma, 'Some observations on the
Nidhanpur C.P. of King Bhāskaravarman', Journal of the Univer-
sity of Gauhati, Vol. XII. No. 1 Arts, 1961, p. 134.
(3) Same as Jaya-skandhāvāra, "The victory
camp' or 'The victory capital'.
STEYADAṆḌA--A punishment befitting a theft.
(AŚ. III. 9).
STRĪDHANA--(1) A woman's exclusive property.
(2) According to Kauṭilya it is of two types, viz.
Vṛtti (land or other such properties or cash given
to serve as a source of income or maintenance)
and Ābandhya (Ornaments and other such gifts)
(AŚ. III. 2). vṛttirābandhyaṁ vā strīdhanam.
(3) According to Manu it is of six types, viz.
Adhyagni (what is given before the nuptial
fire). Adhyāvāhanika (what is given in time
of receiving the bride on the day of marriage),
Prīti-karma (what is given as a token of love by
friends and relatives other than parents and
brothers), Bhrātṛ prāpta (received from brothers)
Mātṛ-prapta (received from mother), Pitṛ-
prāpta (received from father), (Manu Saṁ.
IX.194). This corresponds to what is mentioned by Kauṭilya as
prityāropana (AŚ. III.2). adhyagnyadhyāvāhanikaṁ dattaṁ ca prītikarmaṇi bhrātṛ-
mātṛpitṛprpātaṁ śaḍvidhaṁ strīdhanaṁ smṛtam
The term is defined by neither of the authorities quoted,
presumably because the term is self-explanatory.</p>
<pb n="202" />
<p>STHALA-YODHĪ--A soldier who fights, remaining
on the surface of land (AŚ. VII.10). Opposed
to Nimnayodhī (q.v.).
STHĀNA--Same as Āsana (q.v.) and Upekṣaṇa
(q.v.).
STHĀNIKA--(1) A subordinate officer either
under the Samāhartā or under the Nāgarika.
(2) The entire countryside is divided into four
sectors and each is put under a Sthānika. AŚ. II.34.
(3) The entire city is divided into four wards
and each is put under a Sthānika. AŚ. II.35.
(4) The Sthānika looks after and carries on civil
administrative affairs under the direction of the
Samāhartā or the Nāgarika.
STHĀNĪYA--A major town belonging to a block
of 800 villages. aṣṭaśatagrāmyā madhye sthānīyam (AŚ. II.1).
A court of justice under a Dharmastha is housed in the office of the head
of a Sthānīya (AŚ. III. 1).
STHŪLALAKṢA--Highly generous. A high gene-
rosity is one of the Abhigāmika Guṇas (q.v.).
SVAYAṀ DATTA—(1) One of the 12 varieties of
sons defined by Manu.
(2) Same as Upagata of Kauṭilya.
(3) Manu observes that the son should be either
bereft of parents or abandoned by them for
no adequate reason and then should come to his
new father and offer himself voluntarily as his
son. See Manu Saṁ. IX.177.</p>
<pb n="203" />
<p>SVARĀT--The president of a Svārājya type of
republican state, as explained by Jayaswal.
But it is better to understand the meaning
plainly as 'a sovereign ruler'. (See Svārājya).
SVĀMI--(1) The master or the ruler.
(2) The first of the seven mutually beneficial ele-
ments of the state. U. N. Ghoshal (HIPI. p. 84) renders the term as 'the so-
vereign ruler' and Altekar (SGAI, p. 44) as 'the king'. (AŚ. VI.1). See under
Prakṛti.
SVĀMI-SAMPAT--The ideal qualities of the
master, i.e., the king.
SVĀRĀJYA--(1) As explained by Jayaswal it was
a peculiar type of republican government, which
according to Aitareya Brāhmaṇa VIII.14 pre-
vailed in western India, and the president of
such a republican state used to be called a
Svarāṭ. Jayaswal, Hindu Polity, pp. 76 f.
Cf. etasyāṁ pratīcyāṁ diśi ye ke ca nīcyānāṁ rājāna
ye'pācyānāṁ svārājyāyaiva te'bhiṣicyante svāraḍ ityenān
abhiṣiklān ācakṣato. . . . . . (Aitareya Brāhmaṇa VIII:14).
In this and the following passages of the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa,
up to VIII.19, we have references to terms like Bhaujya, Vairājya
and Svārājya, which are tried to be explained as various forms
of republics. But a careful examination of the passages shows
that these terms imply various degrees of the states of a king.
Indra had been consecrated in the various directions for various
degrees of supremacy as a king, called Bhaujya, Svārājya, etc.
Hence, the later kings of the respective regions also came to
be known by the respective terms like Bhaujya, Svārājya, etc.
By the plural number in the references to these practices (e.g.
te'bhiṣicyante) only the very many kings of the successive periods
or of the different kingdoms of the respective regions are referred
to. These terms do not seem to refer to anything of the sort of
a Gaṇarājya (q.v.) or Gaṇa-republic.</p>
<pb n="204" />
<p>(2) While commenting on Aitareya Brāhmaṇa,
VIII.14 ff., Sāyaṇa gives the meaning of this
term as 'independence'. A.B. Keith, in the same
context, renders the term as 'sovereignty'.
HASTIVYŪHA--A battle order consisting of ele-
phants (AŚ. X.5).
HASTYADHYAKṢA--Superintendent of ele-
phants. The officer was to look after the training
and well being of all the elephants of the state.
(AŚ. II.31).
HIRAṆYA--Tax payable to the King in cash (and
most probably in gold coins alone). The term
occurs in the Banskhera Copper Plate of Har-
ṣavardhana, side by side with the terms Bhāga
and Bhogakara, which also mean other forms
of taxes. Vide, Raj Bali Pandey, Historical and Literary Inscriptions,
p. 145 f. bhāga-bhoga-kara-hiraṇyādi (line 12).
Hiraṇya may be a tax in addition to
other dues or in lieu of the share of the produce.
HIRAṆYA-SANDHI--Treaty for the acquisition
of wealth. When in a Sandhi both parties aim
at gaining some wealth, it is called Hiraṇya-
sandhi. (AŚ. VII.9).</p>
<pb n="205" />
<p>BIBLIOGRAPHY
(A) Original Sources
Abhijnana-Sakuntala of Kalidasa
Ācārāngasūtra or Ayaramgasutta
(1) ed by Jacobi, 1882,
(2) ed by Asiatic Society of Bengal
Agni Parāṇa
Aitareya Brāhmaṇa with Sayaņas Com. (Anand-
ashrama edn. 1931).
Amarakośa
Anguttara Nikāya
Apastamba Dharmasūtra
Arthasastra of Kautilya
(1) Text ed. by R. Shamasastry, Mysore 1909
(2) English trans. by R. Shamasastry, 3rd edn.,
Mysore 1929
(3) Text with Bengali trans. by Radhagovinda
Basak, Vol. I. 3rd edn. Calcutta 1970, Vol. II.
2nd edn. Calcutta 1967
Atharvaveda
Avadānaśataka
Brhaspati Smrti (Reconstructed), by K. V. Ranga-
swami Aiyanger, Oriental Series, Vol. LXXXV.
Baroda, 1941
Digitized by Google
185
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="206" />
<p>186
Dasakumāracarita of Dandin
Digha Nikaya
Gautama Dharma Šāstra
Harşacarita of Baṇabhaṭṭa
Hitopadeśa
Jātakas
Political Concepts in Ancient India
Kamandakıya Nītisāra
Kamasutra of Vatsyāyana
Kāṭhakasaṁhitā
Kirātārjuniya of Bharavi
Maitrāyaṇīsamhitā
Mahābhārata, with the Bharatabhāvapradipa Com.
of Nilakantha. (Citrasala Press edn)
Mahāvagga
Manu Samhita or (Manu Smrti)
(1) With Kulluka's Com. ed. with Bengali trans.
by Pancanan Tarkaratna, Calcutta, 1330 Sal.
(2) With the Manubhāṣya Com. of Medhatithi, ed
by MM. Ganganath Jha, Vol. II. Royal Asiatic
Society of Bengal, Calcutta, 1939.
Meghaduta of Kalidasa
Mṛcchakatika of Śūdraka
Mudrārākṣasa of Visakhadatta, ed with English
trans. and notes by K. D. Dhruva, 1900
Nitivakyāmṛta of Somadevasūrī
Raghuvamsa of Kalidasa
Rāmāyaṇa, with the Tilaka Com. of Rama. Nirnaya
Sagar Press, 4th edn. Bombay 1930
Rgveda
Satapatha Brāhmaṇa
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="207" />
<p>Bibliography
Šiśupālavadha of Magha
Ś ukr anītisāra
Taittiriya samhitā
Ventsamhāra of Bhaṭṭanārāyaṇa
Viṣṇudharmasūtra, ed by Jolly, Calcutta 1881
Yajnavalkyasmṛti with Mitākṣară com. of Vijñāne-
śvara, Nirnaya Sagar Press, 5th edn. Bombay 1949
187
(B) Modern Works
Aiyangar, K.V.R.: Rajadharma, Adyar, 1941
Altekar, A. S. State and Government in Ancient
India, 3rd edn. Delhi, 1958
Apte, V. S.: The Students' Sanskrit English Dic-
tionary, 1970 edn.
Banerji, S. C. : A Glossary of Smrti Literature, Cal-
cutta, 1963
Basham, A.L.: The Wonder that was India, London,
1969
Bhandarkar, D.D. : Some Aspects of Ancient Hindu
Polity, Benares, 1929
Kāmarūpaśāsanāvalī,
Chakravarti, P. C.: The Art of War in Ancient
India, University of Dacca, 1941
Bhattacharyya, P. N. :
Rangpur, 1338 Sal.
Chaudhuri, P. C.: History of Civilisation of the
People of Assam, D.H.A.S., Gauhati
Date, G.T. The Art of War in Ancient India,
London, 1929
Dikshitar, V.R.R. : (1) War in Ancient India, 2nd
edn, Madras, 1948
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="208" />
<p>188
Political Concepts in Ancient India
(2) Hindu Administrative Institutions, Madras,
1929
Ghoshal, U.N.: (1) A History of Indian Political
Ideas, Oxford University Press, 1966 edn.
(2) Hindu Revenue System, Calcutta, 1925
Haug, Martin : The Aitareya Brāhmaṇa (Asiatic
Society)
Jayaswal, K. P. : Hindu Polity (Parts I and II),
4th edn. Bangalore, 1968
Jacob, Col. G.A.: A second Handful of Popular
Maxims (Laukika Nyayañjali), Nirnaya Sagara
Press, 1909
Jolly, J.: Hindu Law and Custom (Trans. from
German by B. K. Ghosh, Calcutta, 1928)
Kane, MM. P.V.: History of Dharmaśāstra, Vol.
III
Kantawala, S. G. : Cultural History from the
Matsyapurāṇa, Baroda, 1964
Keith, A.B.: The Rgveda Brāhmaṇas: The Aita-
reya Brāhmaṇa and the Kausitaki Brāhmaṇa</p>
<p>(Harvard Oriental Series, XXV)</p>
<p>Law, N.N.: Aspects of Ancient Indian Polity, Ox-
ford, 1921
MacCrindle, J. W.: The Invasion of India by
Alexander the Great, 1896
Macdonell and Keith : Vedic Index of Names and
Subjects, (Vol. I and II) Varanasi, 1958
Mahalingam, T.V. : Administration and Social Life
under Vijaynagara
Majumdar, R.C. : Corporate Life in Ancient India,
2nd edn. Poona, 1922
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="209" />
<p>Bibliography
Mishra, B.B.: Polity in the Agnipurāṇa, Calcutta,
1965
Pandey, Raj Bali : Historical and Literary Inscrip-
tions, Varanasi, 1962
189
Prasad, B. (1) The State in Ancient India, Allaha-
bad, 1923;
(2) Theory of Government in Ancient India, Alla-
habad, 1927
Saletore, B.A.: Ancient Indian Political Thought
and Institutions
Sharma, M.M. : Inscriptions of Ancient Assam</p>
<p>(MS. for Press, seen through Courtesy)</p>
<p>Shastri, J.L. : Political Thought in the Purāṇas
Lahore, 1944
Sircar, D.C.: (1) Select Inscriptions Bearing on
Indian History and Civilisation, Vol. I. 2nd edn.,
Calcutta, 1965
(2) Indian Epigraphical Glossary, Delhi, 1966
Spellman, J.W.: Political Theory of Ancient India
Varma, V.P.: Studies in Hindu Political Thought
(C) Select Papers
Dandekar, R.N.: (1) "Sources of Ancient Indian
Polity, Atharva veda, III. 4".
Professor B.K. Barua Commemoration Volume
(ed. by Maheswar Neog and Mukunda Madhava
Sharma), Gauhati, 1966
(2) "Sources of Ancient Indian Polity, Atharva-
veda, VII. 12"
Professor S. K. Bhuyan Com. Volume (ed. by
Maheswar Neog and H. K. Barpujari), Gauhati,
1966
Digitized by
Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="210" />
<p>Hopkins, W.: "The Social and Military Position
of the Ruling Caste in Ancient India as repre-
sented by the Sanskrit Epic", Journal of the
American Oriental Society, XIII.
Mookerjee, Satkari: "Political Wisdom of Ancient
India", Journal of the Bihar Research Society,
Vol. XXXXV, Parts I-IV, December 1959
Pandey, K.C. : "Rajanīti or Politics" Indian
Antiquary, New Series, Vol. I., No. 2, April,
1964.</p>
<pb n="211" />
<p>Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="212" />
<p>Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="213" />
<p>Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
<pb n="214" />
<p>THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
UNDERGRADUATE LIBRARY OVERDUE FINES:
$0.25 per day for NORMAL CIRCULATION
$2.00 per day for RECALLED ITEMS
DATE DUE
OCT 3 0 1998
Digitized by Google
Original from
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN</p>
</body>
</text>
</TEI>